Digital PDFs

DEC-14-ISUMA-B-D

May 1974

163 pages

Original

3.7MB

Document:	Industrial 14 Software Manual
Order Number:	DEC-14-ISUMA-B-D
Revision:	000
Pages:	163
Original Filename:	https://svn.so-much-stuff.com/svn/trunk/pdp8/src/dec/dec-14-isuma/dec-14-isuma-b-d.pdf

OCR Text

SOFTWARE

MANUAL

BPfTf

fT|T]-rf,-T:-pi

^pi]

DEC-14-ISUMA-B-D

INDUSTRIAL 14

SOFTWARE MANUAL

digital equipment corporation • maynard. massachusebts

1st Edition, July

The material

this

purposes and

subject to change without notice.

manual

for Informational

Digital

Equipment Corporation assumes no respon-

sibility

for any errors

which may appear in this

manual.

Printed in U.S.A.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment
Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts:

DEC

PDP

FLIP CHIP

FOCAL
COMPUTER LAB

DIGITAL

1974

CONTENTS
Page

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL 14 PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING THE INDUSTRIAL 14
INPUT/OUTPUT AND INTERNAL FUNCTION ORGANIZATION
Industrial

14 Inputs

Industrial

14 Outputs

Internal Functions

BOOLEAN REPRESENTATIONS OF MACHINE CONTROL
Equations Containing NOT

1-1
1-1
1-1

1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3

Evaluating Equations

1-4

Equations with Variable Groups

1-4

Equation Simplifications

1-5

INDUSTRIAL 14 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION TO THE INDUSTRIAL 14 SOFTWARE

1-5

1-6

BOOL-143

1-6

SET-143
PAL-143
ODP-143

1-6

CHAPTER 2

1-6

INDUSTRIAL 14 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

BASIC INSTRUCTION CLASSES

INDUSTRIAL 14 TEST FLAG
INDUSTRIAL 14 TEST INSTRUCTIONS
INDUSTRIAL 14 SET OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS
ADDRESSING MEMORY IN THE INDUSTRIAL 14

2-1
2-1

2-1

2-2
2-2

Memory Organization

2-2

Absolute Address and Page Addresses

2-3

Industrial

14 Program Flow

INDUSTRIAL 14 JUMP INSTRUCTIONS

2-3

2-4

ConditionalJump Instructions

2-4

Unconditional Jump Instructions

2-6

Subroutine Jump Instructions

2-6

CHANGE FIELD INSTRUCTIONS

2-7

SAMPLE INDUSTRIAL 14 EQUATION AND ANALYSIS
PROGRAM EXAMPLES
Boolean OR Control Function
Example 1 -Control Function
Boolean and Control Function

Example 2 — Control Function
Control Functions with Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) Contacts

Example 3- Control Function
Latching Control Function

Example 4 -Control Function
Relay Controlled Function

Example 5 — Control Function
Simplifications

Example 5, Simplified -Control Function

2-8

2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11

2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14

CONTENTS (Com)
Page

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 3

INTERNAL I/O GROUPINGS
ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL I/O GROUPING
RETENTIVE MEMORIES

3-1

SHIFT REGISTERS

3-4

TIMERS

3-6

EVENT COUNTERS
UP/DOWN COUNTERS
CASCADING A TIMER AND COUNTER
NON-RETENTIVE INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

3-7

CHAPTER 4

3-1

3-3

3-8
3-8
3-9

BOOL-143 CONTROL EQUATION TRANSLATOR

VT14 COMPATIBILITY
BOOL-143 STATEMENT

4-1
4-1

Input, Output, and Internal Function Specification

4-2

Operators

4-2

Variable Groups

4-3

Statement Continuation

4-3

Comments

4-4

SUBROUTINES AND STORAGE OUTPUTS

4-4

Intermediate Results

4-4

Z-Functions

4-4

R-Functions

4-5

SUBROUTINE EXAMPLES
CONTROL STATEMENTS
Shift Circuits .SR

4-6
4-7

mmmm, nnnn

4-7

.FLD
Partition .PRTN = nnnn

4-7

mmm and .TSEC mmm
Counter Preset .CNTR mmm

4-7

End of Program - .END or .ENDN
End of Tape - .EOT

4-8

Field 1

4-7

Timer Preset .SEC

4-8

Memory Allocation

4-8

Start of Program - .LOC

Spacing Between Equations- .F

4-7

4-10
I

XS or .VARS

MONITORING PROVISIONS IN BOOL-143
Monitor Transitions to ON — .MN
Monitor Transitions to OFF — .MF
Monitor All Transitions - .MFN
.

Monitoring Input Transitions

ERROR MESSAGES
OPTIMUM FORM FOR BOOL-143 EQUATIONS
SAMPLE BOOL-143 PROGRAM

4-10

4-10
4-1

4-11

4-11
4-11

4-12
4-15
4-17

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

CHAPTER 5

SET-143 SYMBOLIC EQUATION TRANSLATOR

Hardware Requirements

5.^

Symbols

51
51

Symbol Definition
Symbol Table

5.2

Symbolic Equations

5.3

Handlingof BOOL-1 43 R and Z Functions
Comments
BOOL-143 Control Statements

5.4

5.3
5.4

Error Messages

5.4

Error Listing

5.5

Sorted Symbol Table

5.5

Sample SET-143 Program

5.5

CHAPTER 6

PAL-143 SYMBOLIC PROGRAM ASSEMBLER

PAL-143 GENERAL FEATURES

6-1

Location Assignment

g.2

Symbolic Addresses

g.2

ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS
PAL-143 PROGRAM CONVENTIONS

6-3
6-4

Comments

g.4

Multiple Location Instructions

6.4

Permanent Symbol Table

g.4

User Symbol Table

g.7

Special Characters and Operators

g.7

Addition and Subtraction
Logical

Period

g.g

OR
.

g.g

Pseudo-Instructions

END
EOT
LOC
PAGEJ
^^^
FLD 1
PAL-143 INTERROGATION
Binary Output

Assembly Listing

Symbol Table
Error Messages
Error Listing

Sample Output

gg
'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'..'.

6-9
g.g

6.9

610
6-10

6-10

gl.
g1^
g1
61
g.12

g15
g15

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

ODP-143 ONLINE DEBUGGING PROGRAM

CHAPTER 7

MODES OF OPERATION
CONVENTIONS

^''

ODP-143 COMMAND DESCRIPTION

^"^

SWITCH REGISTER 5

^'^

RUBOUT KEY
PROGRAM COMMANDS

^'^

Interface Commands

Zero Memory Command

Read Commands
Low-Speed Reader
High-Speed Reader

^'"^

7 3
7 3

7-3
7 3

^'^

Change Memory Field

Open Location Commands
Open a Location Symbolically
Open a Location Numerically
Open I/O Status Word
List Commands
List Symbolically

List Numerically

^"^
7 fi
^"^
7-7

Interrogation Command

I/O Interrogate Disables
Start Command

Punch Commands
Low Speed Punch
High Speed Punch
Verify Commands

RUN MODE COMMANDS
Interrogation Command

ID Interrogate Disables Command

7 R
7 8

^'°

^"^
7-9
^'^
7 9

^"^"

Disable and Enable Commands

Force Commands
Halt Program Execution Command

Using the Disable/Force Feature

ODP-143 SUMMARY

CHAPTER 8

7 1n

7 11
^^''

PDP-8 OPERATIONS

PDP-8 SWITCH AND SWITCH REGISTER OPERATIONS

8-1

PDP-8 LOADER PROGRAM

^-^
8-2

Loading the RIM Loader

Loading a Binary Tape

PDP-8 EDITOR
Composing Source Program

8 3
^'^

Q A

Updating Source Programs

Text Buffer

^"*

Modes ot Operation

" ^
Q C

Transition Between Modes

Adding Text to the Buffer

8-5

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page
Editing Keys

8-5

Reading a Paper Tape

g.g

Listing a Program

g.g

Inserting a New Line of Text

8-6

Deleting Lines from the Text Buffer

8-6

Changing Lines of Text

8-6

Moving Lines of Program Text

8-7

Search Feature

8-7

Special Characters

8-8

Punching a Source Tape

8-8

Editor Summary Tables

8-8

Loading the Editor

8-9

Starting the Editor

8-9

SET-143/8 OPERATIONS

8-^^

Loading and Starting SET-143

8-11

Using SET-143

8^^

BOOL-143/8 OPERATIONS

8-^1

BOOL- 143/8 Options

'
!

8-11

Binary Output

8-12

Compiler Listing

8-12

Source Program

8-13

VTMCompatability

8-13

Loading and Starting BOOL-143/8
PAL-143/8 OPERATIONS

8-13
8-14

Loading and Starting PAL-1 43/8

8-14

Assembly Passes

8-16

Error Halt

8-16

ODP-143 OPERATIONS
USING OS/8 SYSTEM TO DEVELOP INDUSTRIAL 14 PROGRAMS

8-16
8-16

Saving 143/OS8 Programs

8-16

Command Decoder Input Strings

8-17

143/OS8 Program Differences
143/OS8 I/O Errors

8-17

CHAPTER 9

8-18

MONITORING

INTRODUCTION
MONITORING FACILITIES
MONITORING APPROACHES
DUAL INTERFACE PORTS
INTERNAL INSTRUCTIONS
MEMORY INSTRUCTIONS
I/O CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
I/O MANIPULATION INSTRUCTIONS

g.-,

9-1
9-1

9-3

9-3
9-3
9-6
9-6

I/O POLLING

PROCESSOR STATUS WORD
ERROR CONDITIONS
INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES
INTERFACE OPTIONS
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

9-9
'

9-10

g.^g
9-11

9-12

9-13

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page

DA14-E PARALLEL INTERFACE
DC14-F SERIAL INTERFACE

9-14

PROGRAM EXAMPLES

9-18

9-16

APPENDIX A

INPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET

APPENDIX B

OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET

APPENDIX C

INTERNAL FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT SHEET

APPENDIX D

INDUSTRIAL 14 PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WITH THE VT14

ILLUSTRATIONS
Title

Figure No.

Page

1-1

Input Assignment Sheets

1-2

Output Assignment Sheet

1-2

1-3

Ladder Diagram

1-3

1-4

Ladder Diagram Illustrating NOT Function

1-3

1-5

Evaluating Equations

1-4

1-6

Industrial 14 Program Execution Cycle

1-6

2-1

Octal Counting Technique

2-3

2-2

Industrial

2-4

14 Memory Organization

2-3

Ladder Diagram for Boolean OR Function

2-10

2-4

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for Example 1

2-11

2-5

Ladder Diagram for Boolean AND Function

2-11

2-6

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for Example 2

2-11

2-7

Ladder Diagram with NO and NC Contacts

2-12

2-8a

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for Example 3

2-12

Using Normally Closed Contacts

2-8b

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram of Normally Open

Input for Example 3

2-12

2-9

Ladder Diagram for Latched Control Function

2-13

2-10

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for Example 4

2-13

2-11

Ladder Diagram for Relay Controlled Function

2-13

O
10
£.£.

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for Example 5

2-14

2-13

Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for Example 5, Simplified

2-14

3-1

Internal I/O Groupings

3-2

Retentive Memory Circuit and Boolean Equations to Record

3-1

3-3

Full-Depth Reached
3-3

Shift Register Circuit and Boolean Equations to

Track a Reject Part

3-4

General SR Parallel-Load Circuit Ladder Diagram

3-5

Industrial 14 Memory Allocation for Shift Registers

3-5

Uduucf

3-7

Ljfiavji

an la aiiu uuuicait i^L^uaLiwiia \.\j

Link Two Shift Registers

3-5

Timing Circuit Operation Timing

3-6

VIM

ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont)
Figure No.

Title

Page

3-8a

Turn-On Delay Circuit Timing

3-8b

On-Delay Timer Operation Ladder Diagram

3-6

3-9a

Timer Lockup Circuit Timing

3-6

3-9b

Timer Loci<up Circuit Ladder Diagram and Boolean Equations

3-7

3-1 Oa

3-10b

OFF Delay Timer Circuit Timing
OFF Delay Timer Circuit Ladder Diagram and Boolean Equations

3-1 la

Circuit Timing for Energizing an Output for a Fixed

3-11 b

Circuit and Boolean Equations to Energize an Output for a

3-12

Up Counter Circuit and Boolean Equations to Shut Down

3.6

3.7
3-7

Interval Following De-energization of an Input

3.7

Fixed Interval After De-energization of an Input

3-8

a Station on Three Successive Bad Parts

3-8

3-13

Up/Down Counter Circuit and Boolean Equation Parts
on a Conveyor to a Maximum of Six

3-9

3-14

Circuit and Boolean Equations to Cascade a 60 Second

Timer With a 60 Minute Counter

3-10

3-15

Clear Timer if Power is Lost Ladder Diagram

3-10
3-10

3-16

Circuit to Clear One Bit of a Shift Register on Power Failure

4-1

BOOL-1 43 Programming Procedure

4-2
4-3

VT14 Screen (Circuit Diagram Too Wide for Display)
VT14 Screen (Circuit Diagram Too High for Display)

5-1

InputSymbol Table to SET-143

5-2

SET-143 Input Program

5-6
5-7

4-2

4-16

5-3

SET-143Translated Symbol Table (Optional)

5-4

SET-143 Translated Program

5-8

5-5

Sorted Symbol Table (Optional)

5-9

6-1

Procedure for Developing Programs Using PAL-143

7-1

Disabling Inputs and Outputs

7-2

6-1

7-10

Automatic Cycle Light Control Circuit, Boolean Equation
and Industrial 14 Instructions

8-1

7-11

PDP-8/1, 8/L, 8/E, 8/F and 8/M Switch Settings for
Octal Digits 0-7

8-1

8-2

Switches Set to Octal Number 5

8-2

8-3

Switch Register Set to 1634g

8-2

8-4

Switch Register Set to 22008

8-2

8-5

Switch Register Set to 02008

8-2

8-6

Paper Tape Load Point

8-4

8-7

Transitions Between Editor Modes

8-8

BOOL-143/8 Operational Flowchart

8-5

8-15

9-1

Industrial

9-2

Status Reporting

9-2
9-2

14 Monitoring Facilities

9-1

9-3

Polling

9-4

Computer Command

9-2

9-5

Down Line Loading

9-2

9-6

Industrial 14 Dual Interface Ports

9-3

9-7

I/O Storage Memory Organization

9-8

Disable Storage Memory Organization

9-9

Organization of Bit-Oriented Internal Functions

9-10

Internal Function Storage Format

9-9
9-9

9-10

ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont)
Title

Figure No.

Page

9-11

Read I/O Output Register Format

9-11

9-12

Processor Status Word Format

9-11

9-13

9-16

9-17

DA14-E Execute Subroutine
DC14-F Receiver Data Format
DC14-F Transmitter Data Format
KL8-JA Receiver Word
DC14-F Execute Subroutine

9-18

Polling a Single Point

9-21

9-19

Polling Eight Points in Parallel

9-22

9-20

Setting a Single I/O Bit

9-23

9-21

Loading Eight I/O Points in Parallel

9-23

9-22

Loading a Timer Preset

9-24

9-23

Reading a Timer Preset

9-24

Reading a Memory Location Within the Industrial 14

9-25

Writing a Memory Location Within the Industrial 14

9-25

D-1

JFN Restriction Ladder Diagram, Boolean Equation

9-14
9-15

9-16

9-17
9-17
9-17

9-19

and Equivalent Industrial 14 Instructions

D-1

D-2

Circuit Diagram

D-3

Shift Register Circuits for VT14 Compatibility

D-3

TABLES
Table No.

Title

Page

2-1

Industrial

14 Test Instructions

2-1

2-2

Industrial

14 Set Output Instructions

2-2

2-3

Industrial 14 ConditionalJump Instructions

2-5

2-4

Industrial 14 Unconditional Jump Instructions

2-6

2-5

Industrial

2-6

2-8

2-7

Change Field Instructions
Sample Industrial 14 Program

3-1

Typical Assignment of Internal I/O Numbers

3-2

Possible Internal Function Groupings

3-3

Up/Down Counters
BOOL-143 Equation Characters
Summary of Control Statements

3-9

4-12

4-3

Errors Detected and Diagnosed by BOOL-143

4-13

5-1

7-1

SET-143 Error Messages
PAL-143 Permanent Symbol Table Industrial 14 Instructions
PAL-143 Special Characters
Inclusive OR For Octal Numbers
Errors Recognized by PAL-143
Use of the LS Command

7-2

Program Mode Commands

7-11

7-3

@ Run Mode Commands

7-12

7-4

ODP-143 Error Messages And Causes

7-13

8-1

Special Editor Keys

8-2

Summary of Editor Commands

4-1

4-2

6-1

6-2

6-3

6-4

14 Subroutine Jump Instructions

2-7

2-8

4-3

5-4
6-5
6-8
6-8

6-12
7-6

8-9

8-10

TABLES (Cont)
Table No.

8-3

Title

Page

8-4

143/OS8 Program Specifications
143/OS8 I/O Error IVIessages

9-1

IVIemory Control Instructions

9-2

I/O Control Instructions

9-5

9-3

I/O Manipulation Instructions

9-7

8-17

8-18
9-4

9-4

Possible Internal Function Partitions

9-11

9-5

Industrial

14 Interface Characteristics

9-13

9-6

Industrial

14 Interface Flag Meanings

9-14

9-7

DA14-E Interface Instructions

9-15

9-8

KL8-JA lnstructionsforDC14-F Communication

9-18

9-9

I/O Number Ranges

9-21

D-1

Industrial

14 Instructions Compatible With the VT14

D-2

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION TO
INDUSTRIAL 14 PROGRAMMING
AND

INTERNAL

outputs

must be assigned to the

Anyone who has designed machine controls has actually

INPUT/OUTPUT

functioned as a progrannmer. Although relays are used

ORGANIZATION

rather than a computer, the designer must specify a series

Machine

inputs

machine

Industrial

14 input (I) and output (0) converters before an

of a

Industrial

14 control program can be written; internal

events

(in

certain

sequence)

operations.

general

sense,

control

specification

this

and

FUNCTION

sequence of events is equivalent to performing a program-

functions must be assigned within the Industrial 14. These

ming task in conjunction with a computer.

assignments permit the Industrial 14 instructions to test the
state of specific inputs, outputs, and internal functions.

PROGRAMMING THE INDUSTRrAL 14
The Industrial 14 System has been specifically designed for

Technical descriptions of the I/O converters are contained

controlling machines and processes. The programmer speci-

only

fies

the

particular
relay

control

function

application; this

performed

function can be specified

maximum of 32 input panels are available, each
panel containing 16 input converters, allowing a maximum

symbology and entered via the VT14 Programming

Terminal

or,

described

this

manual, specified

of 512 Industrial 14 inputs. Sixteen possible output panels
are available; each panel containing 16 output converters,

equations or instructions and entered via a digital computer. In either instance, the control engineer

the

content of the

directing

the

Industrial

14's

for a total of 256 available outputs.

specifying

memory rather than

actions of an electrician

A total of 256 internal functions are available within the

wiring a relay

panel. Once the control function is specified, the Industrial

Industrial

14 controls a machine (or a series of machines) in the same

state

manner as relays in the same application.

14 fails.

Distinct advantages are evident in

control

with

14 Systems Manual (DEC-14-HSIV1AA-

the Industrial

A-D). A

programming machine
14

compared

14 Controller. These functions retain the current

(ON or OFF) even if primary power to the Industrial

Industrial 14 Inputs

with

The inputs to the Industrial 14 System are limit switches,

"programming" with relays. For example, logic errors are

selector switches, pushbutton switches, etc. Each input can

easier to find and to correct; system changes are accommo-

have only one of two values at any one time, ON or OFF.
These machine inputs are wired to an input converter. An

Industrial

dated painlessly. Programming the Industrial 14 does not
require previous
in

computer experience although experience

if
115 Vac is present at the specific input
The input is OFF to show the absence of
11 5 Vac. For programming purposes, all Industrial 14

input

machine control is necessary.

terminal.

14 programs provide relationships between input

inputs are denoted by numbers 0-777, designated in octal

devices (limit switches, pushbuttons, selector switches, etc.)

(base 8) representation. Specifically, the number 15 desig-

Industrial

and output devices (solenoids, motor contactors, indicator
lights, etc.)

nates a machine input (e.g., a limit switch) which

and devices associated with internal functions

wired

to terminal 14 on the first input panel. Program inputs are

numbered octally; 8s and 9s never appear in the number

(counters, retentive memories, timers and shift registers).
These relationships, or control functions, can be expressed

system.

as Boolean equations, circuit diagrams or machine language

instructions, which, when solved for particular input values,

specify the state

The normal procedure for

(ON or OFF) of an output or internal

assigning input

numbers is to

complete an Input Assignment Sheet, as shown

function.

1-1.

1-1

This sheet

Figure

completed for each input panel used in

the

Industrial

devices, etc. These outputs are placed

14 system. The Input Assignment Sheet

Industrial

for one panel records the following:

14, depending

ON or OFF by the

on the current state of inputs or

256 Industrial
1000-1377
numbers
designated by octal

outputs. For programming purposes, these
a.

14 outputs are

Machine input number (0-777)

inclusive.
b.

LS201

(Limit Switch

(This

201).

will

The procedure for assigning output numbers is similar to
that used for assigning input numbers. A sample Output

familiar symbol to the user.)

Assignment Sheet is shown in Figure 1-2. This sheet should
be completed for each output panel in the Industrial 14
System. The machine output device (solenoid, motor

The function of this input (activated when slide
2 is in the full return position).

contactor, etc.) wired to each output converter terminal

Normal condition of the contacts wired to the
Industrial 14 input converter (normally open or

recorded along with the following information:

normally closed).

Industrial 14 Outputs

I/O Number (1000-1377)

Symbol (SOLA for Solenoid A)

Function (clamps part at beginning of cycle)

Output devices controlled by the Industrial 14 System are
solenoids, motor contactors, small motors, indicators, signal

INPUT AS*GNMENT SHEET
Normal
I/O Number

Function

Symbol

ACTi/Ar£.p ¥^HeN iUOe. Jt

Condition

LS20r

rt/o

AcTiVATSiO WM(£^ Si-IOE. £

Ar POi-L.
rt/o

Z5-202

INPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET
Normal
Function

I/O Number

Symbol

pe>^

CYCt-6,

PUSH e>UrTON

r\/o

?i^iz.

srAK^ Morcfzs fc/sh 3urro\i

n/o

^-"K^--^

ST/l«T

^_^-^^-^

Condition

^-—^^^

Figure 1-1

.-^-^

Input Assignment Sheets

OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET
Function

I/O Number

Symbol

IIZO

50LA

CL^ffiPS

1121

SOl-5

;i?en/KN5

H2Z

SOLF

UNCLAMf^

fAKT AT &E.<i,lKHtNQr

Figure 1-2

OP C.^CL.e.

WEAP, /{crWAT^O 6V L5I^
P!Afn

WHEN ^5^ 'S XfKxfPeX}

Output Assignment Sheet

1-2

Internal Functions

Equations Containing NOT

A similar assignment procedure is followed for internal

The equation operator / (NOT)

functions as described in Chapter 3.

functions.

BOOLEAN

REPRESENTATIONS

MACHINE

often used

control

For example, the equation

CONTROL
Programming the Industrial 14 System requires familiarity

1027 = 5*/ 30

with simple Boolean equations for control functions. These

equations comprise operators and variables; variables of

could represent the control function "solenoid A is
energized if limit switch 5 is tripped and pushbutton 12 is

Industrial

14 control equations are inputs, outputs, and
internal functions. Each variable has only two states: ON
and OFF. The operators in these equations are as follows:

not activated". This function is equivalent to the following
equation and the ladder diagram in Figure 1-4.

The asterisk(*) denotes the logical AND function
The plus sign (+) denotes the logical OR function
The slant sign (/) denotes the logical NOT function.

SOLA = 5LS*/12PB
where SOLA corresponds to output 1027; 5LS corresponds
to input 5; and 12PB corresponds to input 30.

For example, the equation

NOTE
A normally closed set of contacts for 12PB is
shown in the ladder diagram. The NOT sign in
the equation means NOT tripped or NOT

1010 = 23+21*1007
set ON when input 23 is ON, or
and output 1007 are ON". This
equation instructs the Industrial 14 to test input 23, and if
it is ON, to set output 1010 ON; if input
23 is OFF, to test
input 21 and output 1007 and if these are both ON, to set
is

read "output 1010

when both input

output 1010 ON.

neither set of conditions

pushed; it is a physical description.

satisfied,

output 1010 is set OFF. This equation could be represented

by the

ladder

diagram

shown

Figure

1-3

and the

12PB

following circuit:

SOLA

5LS

SOLF = 2LS+3LS*7CR
SOLF corresponds to output 1010; 2LS corresponds to
input 23; 7CR corresponds to output 1007; and 3LS
corresponds to input 21.

It is important to remember that
input and output numbers are determined by the terminals

to which these devices are wired.

Figure 1-4

The

SOLF

Ladder Diagram Illustrating NOT Function

NOT sign in the Industrial 14 System relates to the

absence of 115 Vac at an input or output;

2LS

does not

specify physical switch positions. Normally open or normal-

3LS

ly closed contacts can be wired to the Industrial
14,
depending on the user's choice. This is possible because the

7CR

Industrial

14 can test an input for the ON state or the OFF

state; therefore, only

one set of contacts need be wired to

the Industrial 14.

The choice of a normal condition for input contacts must
be

made before

Figure 1-3

writing the

control

equations for the

14 and the normal condition of the contacts
should be noted on the Input Assignment Sheet. When
Industrial

Ladder Diagram

1-3

normally open contacts are used, the equation 1005 = 15

output 1005

specifies that

set

ON when machine input

^^<

15 is activated (e.g., a limit switch is tripped) and 115 Vac
applied.

also specifies that

output 1005

set

OFF

not activated. Using normally closed
when
sense of the logic. When normally
the
reverses
contacts
wired
to the Industrial 14, the equation
are
contacts
closed
input

1005 =/15

specifies that

output 1005

input 15

activated and

set

OFF when

ON when input 15 is not

1001 =

• (2*3)

activated.

Because normally closed contacts result in equations which
appear contrary to common sense, it is suggested that all
normally open contacts be used in the Industrial 14 system.
When considerations such as safety dictate that a normally

must be used, simply reverse the logic;
therefore, 10 would be represented as /10 and /1 would be

closed contact

10.

Evaluating Equations

contains more than one variable,

When an equation

H-023S

important to note the manner in which the output state is
determined. For example, consider the following equation:
Figure 1-5

Evaluating Equations

1001 = 1*2+3
Equations with Variable Groups

Does this equation represent 1001 = (1*2) +3 or 1001 =

Many control equations contain groups of variables which
are separated from the rest of the equation by parentheses.

(2+3)?

Thic

obvious from the two ladder diagrams in Figure 1-5
that the two interpretations are not equivalent.
It

nrniininn

parentheses

result

cimnlv

mpanK that the Content Of the

to be evaluated (for

ON or OFF) and the

to be treated as a single variable of the whole

equation. For example, consider the following equation:

To eliminate possible ambiguities when evaluating equatby the AND (*) operator are always

ions, variables grouped

1021 =/( 121*26)

combined before variables grouped by the OR (+) operator
(when the order of combination is not clearly indicated by
parentheses).

the

preceding example,

second ladder diagram)
expression 1*2+3.

(1*2)

The states of inputs 121 and 26 are tested and the resultant

(the

state of the quantity in parentheses is inverted by the

the correct interpretation of the

operator

to determine the value of output

following truth table summarizes the function:

The following examples show the use of parentheses:

121

121*26

1021=7(121*26)

27+/1 7*20 =27+(/1 7*20)
11 '23+31*14 = (11*23) + (31*14)

ON
ON

OFF

(12+15) */21+22=(12+15)*/21+22
21+22*23+24*25= 21+ (22*23) + (24*25)

OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON

Parentheses can be added wherever necessary to define an

OFF

ON
ON

NOTE
Output 1021 is ON if either 121 or 26 is OFF.

expression more clearly.

The following equation expresses this relation-

When the NOT operator (/) precedes a single variable, the

ship:

equation checks for the absence of the input (or output) at
the

1021 =/121+/26

converter.

1-4

NOT

1021. The

Thus, the following substitution can always be made

The following equation can also be simplified:

control equations:

1006={1*2f3) *4*/3
/ (A*B)

always equivalent to /A+/B
Because of the

A similar substitution

possible for the following equa-

tion:

last

element of the equation

(/3),

output

1006 can never turn

ON when 3 is ON. Thus, the last

element

parentheses (+3)

within

the

meaningless (3

cannot be ON and OFF at the same time). The simplified

1022 = /(107+12)

equation is

The following truth table determines the state of output

1006=1*2*4*/3

1022 for all states of inputs.
and the following rules are established:
107

(107+12)

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF

INDUSTRIAL 14 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

OFF

After recording the input, output and internal assignments

OFF

1022=7(107+ 12)

A*/A can never be true
A+/A is always true

and their functions, the programmer codes the program for
Restating this relationship, output 1022 is

ON only

input

107 and input 12 are both OFF. Thus, the equation can be
rewritten as

all

control functions. In general, an Industrial 14 control

program

consists

1022 = /107*/12

separate

instruction groups. Each
Boolean equation by testing
Industrial 14 inputs, outputs and internal functions;
at its

group solves

instruction

conclusion an output is set either ON or
instruction group in the

and the following substitution is always possible:

tional

jump to the

OFF. The final

program ends with an uncondi-

start of the first instruction

group;

therefore, the Industrial 14 program is a closed loop.

/(A+B) can always be replaced by /A*/B
For example, if a machine control requires 20 outputs, 20
Equation Simplifications

instruction

groups must appear

methods exist to simplify equations before they are
programmed for the Industrial 14. Equations need not be in

Figure

illustrates

Several

1-6

the control program.

the execution of an Industrial 14

program.

the simplest form; in many instances memory locations can

be conserved and executing time for the program can be

The

lessened.

operation

instructions

instruction

Consider the following equation:

instruction groups are often separated

The

by several no

14 NOP
simply a space filler which leaves room for
(NOPs).

Industrial

future program modifications or corrections.

1005= 1+(1*2) + (3*5)
The jump to the start of the program is important. If there
The expression 1 *2 adds no meaning to the equation. If 1 is

was no instruction to return control to the beginning of the

ON, output 1005 will be set ON, regardless of the state of
2; if 1 is OFF, the state of 2 can in no way affect 1005.

tions

program, the Industrial 14 would stop executing instrucwhen it reached the instruction at the end of its

Thus, the equation can be simplified to:

memory and there would be no way for the program to
automatically start again.

1005= 1+(3*5)
Each instruction group is independent of all other instruc-

and the following rule is established:

For example, in the same program, instruction
groups can be controlling one device while other instruction
tion groups.

A+(A*B)=A

groups are controlling a second device. The sharing of an

1-5

Industrial

System

between

many

devices

can

extended until any of the following limits are reached:

INTRODUCTION TO THE INDUSTRIAL 14 SOFTWARE
Two PDP-8 based software kits are available for the
14: one

Industrial

includes programs that operate

PDP-8 paper tape system, the other includes programs that
operate on an OS/8 (Operating System on the PDP-8)

Inputs (512)

Outputs (256)

System. The Industrial 14 Paper Tape Software Kit (option

Internal functions (256)

number

Memory locations (4000 or 8000)

QLR08-AB)

contains

binary

tapes

for

the

following programs:

BOOL-143-a compiler which translates special Boolean
equations into

14 machine instructions. This

Industrial

program is discussed in Chapter 4.

SOLVE FOR
OUTPUT
100)

SET 1001

SET-143-an

optional

(preprocessor)

for

OFF

6-character

Symbolic

Equation

BOOL-143. This program

alphanumeric

symbols

into

Translator
translates

associated

pre-

defined Industrial 14 I/O numbers (0-1777) for processing
'

SOLVE FOR
OUTPUT
1002

by BOOL-143. Therefore, all Boolean equations may be
describe
written with symbols that enable the user to
input and output components and internal
physical

SET 1002

function types

(i.e.,

SRTPB1, CLPSOL, and DWLTMR).

This program is discussed in Chapter 5.

OFF

PAL-143-the

the

Program

Assembly

which have direct counterparts in the machine code of the
Industrial 14. In other words, the PAL-143
translates the symbolic representations into Industrial

assembler

SET 1020

machine code. This program is discussed in Chapter 6.

OFF

GO TO

for

Language of the Industrial 14. An assembly language is a set
(letters)
of instructions in mnemonic or symbolic form

SOLVE FOR
OUTPUT
1020

assembler

ODP-143-a debugging program for Industrial 14 machine

1001

language instructions stored in the Industrial 14's memory.
the
user may examine and change instructions when

The

Industrial

14 program is halted, or examine and set input

and output states during program execution. This program
Figure 1-6

Industrial

is discussed in

14 Program Execution Cycle

1-6

Chapter 7.

The

Industrial 14 OS/8 Software Kit (option number
QLR01) contains binary paper tapes of OS/8 versions of
BOOL-143 {BOOL-143/OS8), SET-143 (SET-143/OS8),

PAL-143 {PAL-143/OS8), and ODP-143 (ODP-143/OS8).
These programs are discussed in Chapters 4, 5, 6 and 7

PAL-143 can be used if greater flexibility in programming
the Industrial

required.

PAL-143 provides the user

with greater flexibility

memory. ODP-143 is also used to

efficient use of

the approach to monitoring and

debug this translated program.

respectively. Loading and operation of these OS/8 versions

are discussed in Chapter 8.
In general,

Before the system software can be understood, the reader

must gain an understanding of the basic
instruction set and

its

Industrial

operation. The instructions used to

BOOL-143 and PAL-143 are mutually exclusive;

the user chooses one or the other, although this is not
absolutely necessary. If the required industrial 14 program

monitor

is a combination of straightforward equations
and more
complicated instruction sequences, the user can compile
part of the program with BOOL-143 and assemble the

loaders

remainder with PAL-143. The two partial programs are
merged by ODP-143. Care must be exercised to ensure that

solve equations are described in Chapter 2; other Industrial

14 and PDP-8 instructions used by an external computer to
an Industrial 14 are described in Chapter 9.
Chapter 8 describes operating procedures for the PDP-8

and introduces a Text Editor program which

memory locations are not used by both the
BOOL-143 compiled program and the PAL-143 assembled

the same

useful for Industrial 14 programming.

program.

The control engineer who is using the computer simply to
program the

Industrial

practical approach.

will

find

BOOL-143 to be a

He can write Industrial 14 programs in

equation form and have

BOOL-143 generate the machine
These machine code instructions are

ODP-143 is a powerful tool for debugging and changing

debugged with ODP-143. BOOL-143 also enables the user

14 users will find ODP-143 helpful, regardless of
whether BOOL-143 or PAL-143 is chosen to translate the

code

instructions.

to perform transition checking,

Industrial

(one form of computer-

monitoring the Industrial 14).

program.

1-7

14 machine language programs. The majority of

CHAPTER 2
INDUSTRIAL 14

BASIC INSTRUCTIONS
Industrial 14 basic instructions specify the state (ON or
OFF) of outputs as a consequence of the changing states of

describing the Industrial 14 processor hardware, in which

the TEST flag is actually a solid-state flip-flop circuit.

both inputs and outputs. They are the primary operating
instructions of the Industrial 14 System.

INDUSTRIAL 14 TEST INSTRUCTIONS
The Industrial 14 test instructions are:

An Industrial 14 program can be written as either equations
Test an input, output, or an internal function for the

for BOOL-143 or as instructions for PAL-143; however, the

form always uses the

program's

final

Industrial

14 instructions used for computer monitoring are

basic

ON state.

instructions.

Test an input, output, or an internal function for the

discussed in Chapter 9.

OFF state.
BASIC INSTRUCTION CLASSES

The symbolic and numeric forms of these instructions and

Three classes of basic instructions are used in Industrial 14

their precise definitions are listed in Table 2-1.

programs:
Table 2-1
Test Instructions- sample the current state (ON or OFF)

Industrial 14 Test Instructions

of an input or output.
Instruction

Set Instructions- set outputs

ON or OFF. The state of

Symbolic

Numeric

Definition

TF 10

4000 +10

Test an input, output, or inter-

inputs is changed by the controlled equipment, not •by the
Industrial 14.

OFF state.

nal function for the

Jump Instructions - execute instructions out of sequence,

"branch" the Industrial 14 program. Instructions are
always executed in sequence unless a jump occurs.
i.e.,

flag

TN 10

6000 + 10

ON and OFF. It is raised (set ON) by a

true test and left unchanged by a false test. (True tests and
flag
set

The condition of the TEST

sampled by jump instructions to cause outputs to be

ON or OFF. In this manner, basic instructions are used

in conjunction with the

internal

set ON; otherwise the flag

remains unchanged.

which records the results of each test command. The TEST

false tests are defined later.)

OFF and the TEST
flag is currently OFF, the TEST
function

INDUSTRIAL 14 TEST FLAG
The TEST flag is the element of the Industrial 14 System
flag has two values:

output

input,

TEST flag to control the operations

Test an input, output or internal
function

for

input,

output

function

the

ON state. If
or

external

ON and the TEST

flag

currently OFF, the TEST

flag

set ON; otherwise the flag

remains unchanged.

of a machine.

NOTE: 10

represents

The TEST flag is sometimes referred to as the test flip-flop

(0-777),

or simply the test flop. This terminology is often used when

(1400-1777).

2-1

outputs

the numeric
(1000-1377) and

values

internal

functions

inputs

The definitions are explained by defining the terms "true

ADDRESSING MEMORY IN THE INDUSTRIAL 14
In

test" and "false test" in the following example:

any computer-like device, it must be possible to specify
portions of a control program. For example,

particular

jump instructions cause the transfer of program control to a

Result of Test

Current

Test For ON

State

Test For OFF

program other than the next sequential

section of the

program. Therefore, the jump instruction must be capable

True

False

of specifying the section of the program (memory location)

OFF

False

True

to which it is transferring control.

Using these definitions, the action of the test instructions
can be summarized by the following statement: Test

TEST flag
the
TEST flag
leave
false
test
in
a
which
result
those
ON;
test, as
false
a
cleared
by
not
flag
is
The
TEST
unchanged.
instructions which result in a true test set the

True Test

OFF

14 memory. The

not of concern at this point in the

discussion, although it should be noted that the instructions

stored

are

numeric order

(in

first,

second, third

location, etc., through to the last memory location).

memory

Each

locations has an assigned number, or

tions (each has an address) which are stored in

This

locations.

False Test

ON
ON

address. Thus, an Industrial 14 program consists of instruc-

TEST Flag State After Test

State

storage processor

of these

shown in the following example:
Current

All instructions are stored in the Industrial

numbering

system

(addressing

memory
scheme)

instructions to direct the Industrial

permits

jump

"jump

OFF

execution of the instructions starting

memory

location

305" for
in

instance,

14 to
(begin

memory location

305).

INDUSTRIAL 14 SET OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Industrial

Set instructions turn an output ON or OFF at the end of a
sequence of test Instructions. The symbolic and numeric

decimal numbering system. They are numbered in the octal
numbering system wherein the digits 8 and 9 never appear.

forms of these instructions and definitions are listed in
Table 2-2. The SN and SF instructions reference outputs
(1000-1377) and internal functions (1400-1777). Output

Counting

number

similar to counting in the familiar

which follows 7

in octal

10,

and the number

which follows 77 is 100.

Where confusion could occur, octal numbers are usually
subscripted with an 8 (lOg). Thus, lOs is not the same as

they are discussed in Chapter 3.

the decimal number 10. Figure 2-1 illustrates the technique

Table 2-2

for counting in the octal numbering system.

Industrial 14 Set Output Instructions

Memory Organization

Definition

Instruction

2000 +

function designations have no real physical significance;

SNO

octal

converter within the output panel and output rack, and by
the selection of the output cable connector. Internal

Numeric

the

decimal numbering system except that any number which
nnn+oinf
on fi
r>r Q
!n anu nncitinn
i<: fiyrillried. Thus, the
-^ •'» M" J
«J "•
f.v-«....— .. .OUI Lull lO Ull

designations are determined by the position of the output

Symbolic

14 memory locations are not numbered

The main memory of the Industrial 14 is subdivided into
two fields. A field is 4096 (4K) locations* which are
numbered Og — 77778, An Industrial 14/30 Controller can
have one field (4K memory) or two fields (two 4K
memories). An Industrial 14/35 Controller has two fields

Set output or internal function
remains
to the ON state.

ON until it

set

OFF by an SF

(one

or CLR instruction.

8K memory). The lower or first field is designated

Field 0; the upper or second field is designated Field 1

SFO

0000 +

Set output or internal function
to the

OFF state.

The Industrial 14 memory is further subdivided into pages;
each page contains 256 locations. This further subdivision is
used for addressing memory by conditional jump instruc-

remains

OFF until it is set ON by an SN
instruction.

tions. Sixteen pages are in a

NOTE:

represents

numeric

values

outputs

08-3778.

(1000-1377) and internal functions (1400-1777).

*4096,Q = 7777g

4K system; 32 pages are in an

8K system. The 256 locations of a page are numbered

2-2

The page address of a location can easily be determined

Absolute Address and Page Addresses

Each

location

the

Industrial

memory

has

from its absolute address by using the following procedure:

"absolute" address and a "relative" or "page", address.
Figure 2-2 shows the relationship between the numbering

Disregard the

of locations through all of memory (absolute addresses) and

the numbering of locations within each page of
(relative or

address

memory

field;

the absolute

1000 or greater, cross off the first

(most significant) digit.

page addresses). For example, the location with

absolute address 4377 has page address 377. IVIany locations

have the same relative or page address, but each Industrial

the number resulting from step

less than

400, it is the page address.

14 location has a unique absolute address, within a memory
field.

number resulting from step 2 is 400 or

the

greater, the page address

found by subtract-

ing 400 from the step 1 result.
1

The examples below illustrate the procedure.

2
3

4
5

Absolute Address

Page Address

Result

6
7

Because the octal numbering

234

system contains no 8s or 9s,

1234
3347

234

347

after counting to the digit 7,

2652

652

252

place a

the Is column

7521

521

121

and carry 1

7400

400

5000

16
17

This

procedure

location

disregards

2652 in Field

the

memory

field.

However,

and location 2652 in Field 1 are in

memory where different data is stored.
An absolute address, therefore, should include a or a 1
preceding the address to specify the memory field (for

different places in

example 01234,1 2075).
72

As will be discussed later, addresses beginning with 7400

and comprising the last page of Field

(or Field

in a

system) are used for storage of internal functions and are

not available for programming.

76
77

The carry out of the Is place

100

produces a second carry out

101

102

77+1 = 100

103

the

place.
in

the

Industrial 14 Program Flow

When

Hence,

first

powered up, the

Industrial

14 automatically

begins program execution with the instruction stored

octal

location

number system.

etc.

The

of Field 0. It then proceeds to location 1, then 2,
result

testing

operations often causes the

program to jump over groups of instructions; however, the
program continually proceeds toward the end of memory.

When the end of the first memory field is encountered, the
777

Industrial

1000

Figure 2-1

14 automatically passes on to the second field.

When the program cycle has been completed, control is
passed bacl< to the beginning of memory and the cycle
Octal Counting Technique

begins again.

2-3

Memory

Absolute

Page

Field

Address

0000

000^

One Memory Page
(256 locations)

0377
0400

377^
000

One Memory Field (4K)
(4096 locations; 16
pages).

0777
1000

000

7377

377

777

377
000

0000

377

0377
0400

377

7777

377

Figure 2-2

Two Memory Fields
(8K).

000

Industrial

J
14 Memory Organization

INDUSTRIAL 14 JUMP INSTRUCTIONS
Jump instructions cause departures from the sequential

Conditional jump instructions cause an SN (set output ON)

execution of instructions. These departures can be condi-

SF (set output OFF) for the other TEST flag state.

tional

instruction to occur for one state of the TEST flag and an

(dependent upon the result of I/O tests) or uncondi-

tional.

NOTE
Conditional Jump Instructions

The
The

Industrial
state

The JFF and JFN instructions always set the

TEST flag OFF. After execution of a JFF or
JFN instruction, the TEST flag is always OFF,

14 has two conditional jump instructions.

of the

TEST flag determines if the jump will

occur. The symbolic and numeric forms of the conditional
jump instructions, with definitions, are listed in Table 2-3.

regardless

executed.

2-4

of whether or not the

jump was

Table 2-3

1000

Industrial 14 Conditional Jump instructions

1377

3000
3377

5000
5377

3400
3777

5400

7400

5777

7777

7000
7377

Instruction

Symbolic

1400

Numeric

Definition

1777

JFF NNN

2000+ NNN

Jump to location NNN If the

TEST flag is now OFF and
execute

the

instructions

beginning

with

the

instruc-

NNN. (If the
TEST flag is ON, the instructions
following
the
JFF
tion in location

continue to

2400 + NNN

The following

are

examples of

valid

and

invalid

conditional jump instructions:

OFF,

regardless

Location of Instruction:

its

original state.

JFN NNN

on the same page, the conditional jump Instruction Is

valid.

The TEST flag Is

sequence).
set

be executed

the instruction address and the location to be addressed

are

Location to be Addressed:

500
750

Correct Instruction:

JFN 350

Jump to location NNN if the
TEST flag is now ON and

Location of Instruction:

execute

the

Instructions

Location to be Addressed:

beginning

with

the

Correct Instruction;

372
JFF 372

Instruc-

NNN. (If the
OFF, the instructions

tion In location
flag

to be executed

The TEST

Location of Instruction:

JFN continue

following the

flag

sequence).
set

represents the

relative or

page address to

The Instruction JFN 300 illustrates the use of a conditional
jump Instruction. This instruction causes a jump to relative
location 300 on the current page if the TEST flag is ON.
Remember that several absolute addresses have the same
relative or

page address; a conditional jump instruction,

therefore,

has different

different

pages of

examples

Industrial

14 memory.

Correct Instruction:

JFN 345

stored

Location of Instruction:

5500

Location to be Addressed:

5675
JFF 275

Correct Instruction:

which control can be transferred. Legal values are Os to
377g.

meanings when

2005
2345

OFF,

regardless of Its original state.

NOTE: NNN

Location to be Addressed:

Location of Instruction:

2311

Location to be Addressed:

2450

Correct Instruction:

Invalid (off -page reference)

Location of Instruction:

4251

Location to be Addressed:

5300

Correct Instruction:

Invalid (off-page reference)

Refer to the

the following paragraphs to properly under-

stand the memory locations to be addressed. The following

Location of Instruction:

5631

Location to be Addressed:

5237

Correct Instruction:

Invalid (off -page reference)

Location of Instruction:
Location to be Addressed:

435
776

Correct Instruction:

JFN 376

Location of nstruction
Location to be Addressed

2722
3010

Correct Instruction:

Invalid (off -page reference)

examples are the first and last addresses contained on each
page of each field.

0000
0377

2377

4000
4377

6000
6377

0400
0777

2400
2777

4400
4777

6400
6777

2000

2-5

The foregoing examples which were shown to

As stated in Table 2-4, the JMP is a two-location instruction. The first part of the instruction directs the Industrial

be invalid cannot be performed with conditional jump instructions; modifications in the

14 to jump to the address given in the second part of the
instruction. The first instruction executed after the jump is

program are required. The program can be

the one stored in the location

changed to use unconditional jump instructions
to pass from memory page to memory page.

instruction.

Unconditional jump instructions are described

The

NOTE

JMP

instruction

can

the second part of the

reference

any

Industrial

memory location within its memory field using an absolute

in the following section.

address. Thus,

whenever the program must pass between

Unconditional Jump Instructions

memory pages, the unconditional jump is used.

The Industrial 14 has two unconditional jump instructions.
The symbolic form, numeric form and definition of each

For example, to transfer control to location 1523 from

instruction

is listed in Table 2-4.

location 1375, use the instruction:

Content

Location

Table 2-4
Industrial 14 Unconditional Jump Instructions

Definition

Jump

NNNN

location

unconditionally.

JMP

1375
1376

1523

Execution

of the Industrial 14 program

proceeds sequentially, beginning with the instruction
location

NNNN. JMP

(Contains next instruction

1523

to be executed.)

two-location instruction; the

"jump-to" location
in

the

The SKP

instruction

stored

Industrial

address

absolute

use

convenient
is

causes

two-location instruction (such as a JMP).

the

14 to disregard the

The CLRPC instruction is used at the end of the Industrial

the next

location.

Sequen-

14 program to complete the cycle by transferring control
back to the beginning of memory. It is a single-location

execution continues with

instruction that unconditionally causes the instruction in

Industrial

instruction stored

sequential
tial

Its

one Industrial 14 location; therefore, it can be used to skip
any one-location instruction but cannot be used to skip a

memory

unconditionally.

instruction

skip of one

unconditional

need to reference memory. The SKP instruction skips only

Skip the following

location

location.

passed need not be specified. The SKP instruction has no

which contains the

JMP instruction.

This

because the address of the location to which control

the location following that

location

memory

location

second location following the

regardless of

SKP instruction.

located.

Clear

the

to be executed next. This occurs

of Field

the instruction stored in the

where

memory the CLRPC instruction is

Subroutine Jump Instructions

program counter.

Jump instructions that enable subroutines to be used in a

Causes an unconditional jump

program are included in the Industrial 14 basic instruction

to location 0, Field 0.

set.

A subroutine is simply a set of instructions to be

nvrr.«..+Qri

NOlE: NNNN represents an absolute address within une
field of the Industrial 14 memory. No page restriction
exists for the JMP instruction.

mrtro

thon

nnr^

nn parh

naQs:

thrniiah

the

14 memory. Instead of repeating the instruction
set for each time it is to be executed in the program, the
Industrial

2-6

instructions are written only once, in the

The

form of sub-

Repeated execution of the same instructions

routine.

14 permits only one

Industrial

level

of subroutines

because only one return address can be stored atone time.

permitted by an instruction to jump to the start of the

subroutine Instruction. Another instruction causes a return

return address is lost, and return to the original program is

to the main

impossible.

program after all instructions in the subroutine

a subroutine

jumps to

second subroutine, the

first

have been executed.

Table 2-5 lists the jump instructions used for subroutines.
The JMS instruction is similar to the JMP instruction; both

Industrial

are two-location instructions which can address any Indus-

manner:

trial

subroutines

are

written

the following

14 memory location within its memory field. The JMS

differs

from the JMP in that it enables the subroutines to

Main Program

Subroutine

return to the next sequential location following the second
part of the

JMS instruction by saving the address of the

1200TN27
1201 TN 30

next sequential instruction.

TN5
TF7

Table 2-5
Industrial 14 Subroutine Jump Instructions

;

JMR

JFF 250
Instruction

Symbolic

JMS

Numeric

Definition

1200

JFN 250

JMS

0124

Jump

NNNN

beginning

location

TN12

subroutine

the

NNNN.

The Industrial 14 executes, in
sequence,

the

instructions

beginning

with

the

instruc-

location

tion

stored

In this example, the

NNNN, and terminated by a
JMR instruction. The JMS

JMS causes transfer to the subroutine

location

1200. The

subroutine are then executed,

instructions of the

sequence, until the JMR

encountered. Control

instruction

which follows the second part of the two-

all

be within a single memory field.

Jump return to the location

CHANGE FIELD INSTRUCTIONS

following the second part of

Industrial

JMS

then returned to the

location JMS instruction. Subroutine transfers must always

4K of Industrial

14 memory.

14 Controllers equipped with

8K of memory

The

must have the capability of passing from one memory field

JMR must always be paired

to the other. Normally, this is accomplished by permitting

with a JMS instruction.

the

instruction.

program counter to simply overflow from memory

Field

NOTE: NNNN (0-7777)

a two-location

address

0054

starts

instruction which can directly

instruction

JMR

which

represents the absolute address

of the start of a subroutine. No page restriction exists for

via a

into

memory Field 1. The normal return to Field

CLRPC instruction. However, requirements exist for

between fields by other methods; these requirements are served by the CIF instructions in Table 2-6.
passing

the JMS instruction.

2-7

The GIF instructions tal<e effect only when a JMP, JMS,
JMR, JFF, or JFN instruction is executed. Thus, normal
useage has a GIF followed by a JMP NNNN, to transfer to
location NNNN in the other memory field.

SAMPLE INDUSTRIAL 14 EQUATION AND ANALYSIS
The following equation represents a typical control requirement to be programmed:
1001 = 123-^54*1003

Table 2-6
This

Change Field Instructions
Instruction

Symbolic

Numeric

GIFO

0020

could

equation

represent

the

control

function,

"Solenoid A (1001) is energized when pushbutton 43 (123)
is ON, or when both limit switch 12 (54) is activated and
Solenoid C (1003) is energized."

Definition

Ghange to executing instrucon the next
tions in Field

The equation can be solved by the Industrial 14 with the

JMP, JMS, JMR, JFF, or JFN

instructions in Table 2-7.

instruction.

Note that the user must record

the location of each instruction and refer to each input and

output by its I/O number.

Ghange

0030

GIF 1

to executing instruc-

tions in Field

on the next

To demonstrate that the instructions in Table 2-7 actually

JMP, JMS, JMR, JFF, or JFN

solve the equation for

instruction.

all

possible values of the variables,

three cases are analyzed. In each case, the TEST flag

assumed to be OFF as the result of a previously executed
For example, to transfer control to 1 :0100 (location 100 in

JFF or JFN instruction.

Field 1 from Field 0).

Content

Location

CASE 1 -Input 123 0FF, input 54 OFF, and output 1003
OFF; Result: 1001 OFF.

5200

GIF1

5201

JMP

5202

Location

Content

300

TF 123

Program Execution
Input 123

100

flag

tion

tested for the

set ON, and

proceeds to

program executhe

instruction

contained in location 301.

1:0100

(Contains next instruction
to be executed).

(continued on next page)

Table 2-7

Sample Industrial 14 Program
Symbolic

Comment

Location

Content

300

TF123

301

JFF 305

If the flag is

302
303
304
305
306
307

TF54

1001 ON. Otherwise, if either input 54

TF 1003
JFN 307
SN 1001
SKP
SF 1001

input 123 is OFF, the flag is set ON.

OFF, jump to 305 and set

OFF, or if output 1003 is OFF, the

flag is set ON. If the flag is ON, jump

to 307 and set 1001 OFF. Otherwise set

output 1001 ON and skip the set outpuL

OFF instruction.

2-8

OFF

Because it is OFF, the TEST

state.

Location

CASE 2 - Input 123 ON, input 54 ON, and output 1003

Program Execution

Content

OFF; Result 1001 ON.
301

JFF 305

the

point,

TEST flag
the

OFF at this

program

proceeds to

location 305. The flag is ON, how-

and program execution pro-

ever,

Location

Content

300

TF 123

Program Execution
Input
state.

ceeds to the instruction contained
in

TF54

Because

state.

input

301

JFF 305

Because the
this point,

location

TEST flag is OFF at

program execution pro-

location 305. (The TEST flag is

TF 1003

the

location

ceeds to the instruction contained

303.

303

301.

Program execution proceeds to the
contained

proceeds to

contained

OFF, the TEST flag is now set ON.
instruction

OFF

tested for the

execution

instruction

The program tests input 54 for the

OFF

TEST flag remains OFF and pro-

location 302.

gram

302

123

Because input 123 is ON, the

set

The program tests output 1003 for

OFF

the

Because

state.

OFF

by the JFF before pro-

ceeding).

output

1003 is OFF, the TEST flag would
be set ON

if it

305

had not been set ON

SN 1001

by the previous instruction. Pro-

gram

execution

proceeds to

contained

instruction

the

Output 1001 is set ON (as it should
be).

Program execution proceeds to

the

instruction contained

loca-

tion 306.

location

304.

306
304

JFN 307

the

point,

TEST flag
the

OFF at this

program

proceeds to

SKP

instruction contained in loca-

307.

OFF

program

causes

proceed

the

instruction

con-

tained in location 310.

NOTE

and program execution proceeds to
the

instruction

execution to skip location 307 and

location 305 to set output 1001
ON. The TEST flag is ON, however,

tion

This

The instruction in locations 302, 303, 304, and
307 are not executed.

TEST flag is set
the
JFN before

(The

proceeding).

307

SF 1001

Output 1001

set

OFF

(as

CASE 3 - Input 123 OFF, input 54 ON, and output 1003
ON; Result: 1001 ON.

should be). Program execution proceeds to the instruction contained
in

Location

Content

300

TF 123

Program Execution

location 310.

NOTE

Input
state

123

tested for the

and because

OFF

OFF, the

The instructions in locations 305 and 306 are

TEST flag is set ON and program

not executed.

execution proceeds to location 301.

2-9

An explanation of the control function.

Location

Content

Program Execution

301

JFF 305

Because the TEST flag is ON at this

The ladder diagram which would be used to perform
this function.

point, program execution does not

proceed to location 305, but rather
proceeds

the

instruction

A Boolean representation of the control function.

con-

tained in location 302.

TF 54

302

A wiring diagram for the Industrial 14 input and

state.

Because input 54 is ON, the

tested for the

output terminals.

OFF

Input

The Industrial 14 machine instructions for the con-

TEST flag remains OFF and program

execution

proceeds to

trol function.

the

instruction in location 303.

example, the TEST flag is assumed to be initially

In each

TF 1003

303

OFF.

Output 1003 is tested for the OFF
state. Because output 1003 is ON,
the

Boolean OR Control Function — A simple control circuit in

TEST flag again remains OFF

which

and program execution proceeds to
the instruction contained

solenoid
is

with an

Industrial

by either of two

energized

present in Example

switches

loca-

tion 304.

limit

To solve this problem

14, test for either input's

ON state.

Because a positive test from either input sets the TEST flag

ON when the TEST flag
ON, and OFF when the TEST flag is OFF.

to 1, the output should be turned

304

JFN 307

Because the

TEST flag is OFF at
is

this point,

program execution pro-

ceeds to the instruction contained
in

location 305.

NOTE
305

SN 1001

Normally-open

Output 1001 is set ON (as it should
be). Program execution then pro-

each

switch

are

wired to the Industrial 14. Thus, testing for ON

means testing for an activated switch. Testing

ceeds to the instruction contained
in

contacts

for

location 306.

OFF means

testing

for

nonactivated

switch.

306

SKP

This

instruction

causes

program

execution to skip location 307 and

proceed

the

instruction

con-

Example 1 — Control Function

tained in location 310.

NOTE

either Limit Switch

or Limit Switch 2 is ON, energize

Solenoid D (otherwise. Solenoid D should be OFF).

The instruction in location 307 is not executed.
Industrial

14 programs can be written as in Table 2-7, or

they can be written in formats which are more convenient
to

work with. Techniques for writing

Industrial

14 pro-

grams are fully described in Chapters 4, 5 and 6. However,
an understanding of the material described in this chapter is
necessary to perform the debugging procedure required for
all

BOOL-143 and PAL-143 developed Industrial 14 pro-

grams.

PROGRAM EXAMPLES
The following examples shovv* tuc relationship uetween tnc
circuit diagram, the Boolean representation and Industrial
Figure 2-3 Ladder Diagram for Boolean OR Function

14 programs. Each example contains five parts.

2-10

Boolean Equivalent

program jumps to the set output OFF instruction.

Input

Output

1 LS (n/o) 1
2LS(n/o) 12

SOLD 1007

Equation:

OFF

remains

flag

during

the

testing,

the

Solenoid A is turned ON, and the solenoid is energized.

Example 2 - Control Function
If Pushbutton
and Limit Switch 3 are ON, energize
1
Solenoid A (otherwise Solenoid A should be de-energized).

1007=11 + 12or

SOLD= 1LS+2LS

1LS (n/o)

1PB

SOLA
3LS

SOLD
INDUSTRIAL

2LS

(n/o)

^^^

1007
14

Figure 2-5 Ladder Diagram for Boolean AND Function
Figure 2-4 Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for

Example 1
Boolean Equivalent

Input

Industrial 14 Program

Location

Content

1PB (n/o)

Comments

Output

SOLA 1004

3LS(n/o) 13

TF 11

Test input 11 for OFF. If it is ON,

JFF4

set output

TF 12

OFF,

JFN6

SN 1007
SKP
SF1007

5
6

1007 ON. If input 11

Equation:
is

-•

Boolean and Control Function - Example 2 illustrates a
control function where two inputs are in series to drive an

•-

1PB

SOLA

(n/o)

output. In other words, both Limit Switch 3 and Push-

button

1004= 1 * 13or

SOLA= 1PB *3LS

12 for OFF. If
ON, set output 1007
ON, if not, set output 1007 OFF.
input

test

input 12

the

output for

INDUSTRIAL

must be activated for Solenoid A to be energized.

1004
14

3LS

Normally open contacts are wired to the Industrial 14

^^
(n/o)

input.

The Industrial 14 program checks for the condition which
is not wanted. If either input is OFF, Solenoid A must not
be energized. Thus, the program tests both inputs, setting
the TEST flag if either is OFF. If the TEST flag is ON, the

Figure 2-6 Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for

Example 2

2-11

Boolean Equivalent

Industrial 14 Program

Location

Content

TF 1
TF 13
JFN 14
SN1004
SKP

SF 1004

10
11

Comment
Test inputs

and 13.

either

OFF, output 1004 will be set OFF;
otherwise 1004 will be set ON.

Input

Output

6PB (n/o) 6
7PB (n/c) 7
4LS (n/o) 14

SOLC1006

5LS(n/c) 15

1006= (6 * 14) + (7 * 15) or

Equation:

SOLC = (6PB*4LS) + (7PB*5LS)

Control Functions with Normally Open (NO) and Normally
Closed (NO Contacts - Example 3 is a control function

6Pa

(

7P8

(n/c)

n/o)

which (in ladder diagram form) has both normally open and
normally closed contacts. The Industrial 14 does not

SOLC

two types of contacts for such control functions.
normally open contacts can be used, as illustrated in

1006

INDUSTRIAL

require
All

Example 3. Normally open contacts for both Pushbutton 7

4LS (n/o)

and Limit Switch 5 are wired to the Industrial 14. Thus, an
ON input means that the button or switch is activated; an

5LS (n/c)

OFF input means that the button or switch is not activated.
The example also illustrates the combination of AND and

Figure 2-8a Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for

OR functions. Each leg is an AND function and the output
results from the OR of the legs.

Example 3 Using Normally Closed Contacts

14 program could also be written to test
normally closed contacts. The program merely tests for the

The

Industrial

opposite state (ON or OFF) of the input. Thus, if normally
closed contacts are used

Inputs and outputs are often sensed many times throughout

an Industrial 14 program. To avoid confusion, these inputs
and outputs should be wired normally open.t

the wiring, all TFs become TNs

for the input and all TNs become TFs. An

ON input from

normally closed contacts specifies that the switch

Boolean Equivalent

not

activated; an OFF input specifies that it is activated.

Example 3 — Control Function
If
Pushbutton 6 and Limit Switch 4

Input

Output

6PB (n/o) 6
7PB (n/o) 7

SOLC 1006

4LS(n/o) 14
are

ON,

5LS(n/o) 15

Pushbutton 7 and Limit Switch 5 are both OFF, Solenoid C
is energized

(otherwise Solenoid C is de-energized).

1006= (6*14)

Equation:

-i-

(/7*/15)

SOLC = (6PB*4LS)
4LS
(n/o)

6PB

-i-

(/7PB * /5LS)

SOLC

•^^^

6PB (n/o)

(n/o)

SOLC

7PB

5LS

(n/c)

7PB (n/o)

1006

INDUSTRIAL

4LS (n/o)
15

Figure 2-7 Ladder Diagram with NO and NC Contacts

5LS (n/o)

14 - 0z44

Figure 2-8b Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram of

Normally Open Input for Example 3
tuniy inputs sensing emergency or
wired normally closed.

2-12

Industrial 14 Program

Location

Content

TF6

2PB (n/o)

Comment
If either input 6 or 14 is OFF, the
other leg must be tested. If both are

TF 14
JFF23

TN7

TN15

the other leg fails, set output OFF.

JFN24

Set output OFF if both legs fail.

23
24

SN 1006
SKP

SF 1006

ON, the output should be set ON.
If

either input 7 or

15 is ON and

3PB (n/o)

Figure 2-10 Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for

Set output ON if either leg solves.

Example 4
Latching Control Function

Example 4

motor

contactor latching function. Pushbutton 2 (2PB) is the start
button, and Pushbutton 3 (3PB)

Location

Contents

Comment

26
27

TF2
JFF33

otherwise, set output 1010 ON.

TN3

input 3

TF1010

OFF, set output 1010 OFF; other-

32
33
34
35

JFN 35
SN 1010
SKP
SF 1010

wise, set the output ON.

the stop button for

motor contactor. Normally open contacts are

controlling a

assumed

for

however, the

inputs;

all

normally

closed

contact for Pushbutton 3 could be used by replacing TF

by TN 3 in the Industrial 14 program.

The program

uses a test output instruction,

TF 1010, to

latch the motor contact on. The output then remains

long

currently

and

Pushbutton

ON as
is

not

depressed. An Industrial 14 input for the motor contacts
Is

input 2

OFF, test

input 3;
If

ON or output 1010 is

not required because outputs can be tested as inputs.

Relay Controlled Function

Example 5 uses a control
relay to energize a solenoid. All inputs to the
Industrial 14

Example 4 - Control Function

The motor (IM)

is started if Pushbutton 2 is
pressed, and
continues to operate until Pushbutton 3 is pressed.

normally open contacts. (As explained in the two
preceding examples, normally closed contacts could
be used
by reversing the sense of the test instructions.)
Control
Relay 2 is energized by inputs, and latches in the
are

engaged

position. The output for Control Relay 2 is then
tested to

energize Solenoid B.

Example 5 - Control Function
If

Pushbutton 4 is not ON and Limit Switch 2 is actuated,
if either Pushbutton 5 is ON or
Control Relay 2 is

and

ON, then Control Relay 2 is set ON.
Relay 2 is ON, Solenoid B is energized.

already

OFF

Figure 2-9 Ladder Diagram for Latched Control Function

Control

ON
2LS

4PB
Boolean Equivalent

5PB

^^^-

2CR

Input

Output

2CR

2PB (n/o) 2

SOL

IM 1010

3 PB (n/o) 3
Equation:

(/3*1010)

1M = 2PB

-f-

(3PB*1M) or 1010 = 2 +
Figure 2-1 1

2-13

Ladder Diagram for Relay Controlled Function

Simplifications - The control program for Example 5
an
be greatly simplified by noting that Control Relay 2 is

could

Boolean Equivalent

unnecessary output. The control relay

Outputs

Inputs

SOLB 1005

itself

the

Simplified
as an input. Thus, as shown in Example 5,

control
(following), output 1001 can be eliminated and the
1005
of
output
test
the
case,
this
In
removed.
relay can be

2LS(n/o) 12

is equivalent to testing

1377 = /4* (5 + 1377) * 12
1005= 1377 or
2CR = /4PB*(5PB + 2CR)*2LS

Equation:

needed

however,

2CR1277

4PB(n/o)4
5PB (n/o) 5

Industrial 14,
ladder diagram to latch the circuit ON. In the
be tested
may
solenoid
the
energize
to
output
the

output 1001

Example 5, Simplified - Control Function
Switch 2 is actuated,
If Pushbutton 4 is not ON and Limit
Solenoid
B is ON already,
or
ON
5
is
Pushbutton
either
and

SOLB = 2CR

then Solenoid B is engaged.

^^
^7

1377

4PB (n/o)

Boolean Equivalent
Inputs

Outputs

4PB (n/o) 4
5PB (n/o) 5

SOLB 1005

INDUSTRIAL 14

5PB(n/o)

SOLB

,005

2LS(n/o) 12

V
2LS (n/o)

Equation:

14-0248

1005 = /4 * (5 + 1005) * 12
SOLB = /PB* (5PB + SOLB) *2LS

Figure 2-12 Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for

Example 5

4PB (n/o)

Industrial 14 Program

SOLB
1005

Location

Comment

Contents

INDUSTRIAL 14

5PB (n/o)
input 4

ON, or input 12

TN4

TF 12

OFF, or input 5 is OFF, test output

TF5

43
44
45
46
47

50
51

JFF44
TF1001
JFN46
SN1001
SKP

1001; otherwise, set output 1001
1001 is OFF set
If output

output 1001

OFF; otherwise, set
Figure 2-13 Typical Industrial 14 Wiring Diagram for
Example 5, Simplified

output 1001 ON.

Industrial 14 Program

SF 1001

TF 1001
JFN 53
SN 1005
SKP

2LS (n/o)

ON.

Location
If

output 1001

Comments

Contents

OFF, set output
36

TN4

TF 12

OFF,

TF5

set

Example 5 illustrates an important Industrial 14 concept;

was

JFF44
TF 1005

2 CR = 4PB*(5PB+2CR)*2LS. the program was written
the equation 2CR = 4PB*2LS* (5PB+2CR). Programming is more efficient when single variables, connected by

43
44
45
46

1005 OFF; otherwise set 1005 ON.

SF 1005

although

the

original

equation

for

the same operator, (AND or OR) are grouped together.

2-14

JFN 46
SN 1005
SKP
SF 1005

input 4
test

ON and Input 12 is

output 1005; otherwise,

1005 ON. If output
set output 1005 OFF;
OFF,
1005
otherwise, set output 1005 ON.
output
is

Simply set output 1005 ON or OFF
directly, without using intermediate

control relay.

CHAPTER 3
INTERNAL FUNCTIONS
A typical assignment of internal functions using 1600 as the

This chapter describes Industrial 14 internal functions, I/O
groupings, and typical applications. These typical applica-

I/O partition

tions are discussed both in terms of circuit diagrams and

particular importance:

Boolean

equation

logic.

Except for the

shift

shown in Table 3-1

The following are of

application. Industrial 14 machine language is not given for

Each retentive

these applications because the instruction format is similar

memory and shift register bit

requires one I/O number.

to that of output circuits. Timing diagrams are included

with

all

timer applications to illustrate the sequence of

All

operations.

timers

and

counters

require

two

I/O

numbers.

INTERNAL I/O GROUPINGS

The bits of a shift register must be consecutive;

The 256 internal functions which
1400—1777 are subdivided as to type:

use

I/O

numbers

however, shift registers and retentive memories

retentive memories,

may be intermixed.

shift registers, timers, counters, and up/down counters. This

group can be easily adjusted to provide a "best fit" for each

Timers must begin at tfie I/O partition (in this

The normal groupings and I/O number allocations for internal I/O functions are shown in Figure 3-1.

order using

General assignments are as follows:

circuit.

application.

1600) and must be

instance,

consecutive

I/O numbers below any counter

(For this reason, several spare timers are

provided.)

I/O Numbers

Use

1400-1577
1600-1757
1760-1777

Retentive memories or shift registers

up/down

permanent

Four

counters

are

provided in the Industrial 14.

In pairs for timers or event counters
In groups of 4 for up/down counters

ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL I/O GROUPING
While the grouping of internal functions, shown in Figure

1577

1400

1757

1600

1760

1777
3-1,

RETENTIVE MEMORIES 56 TIMERS OR
COUNTERS
OR SHIFT REGISTER BITS

128

4 UP/DOWN

and Table 3-1,

COUNTERS

certain

+ 16

suitable for a

great

number of

applications, it may be necessary to modify this grouping in
instances. This can

be accomplished by adjusting

switches within the Industrial

-H8

necessary

procedure

14 Control Unit and the

described

the

Industrial

Systems Manual. This modification provides additional (or
Figure 3-1

Internal I/O Groupings

fewer)

retentive

sacrificing

The I/O numbers from 1400-1577 may be used for either
retentive

timers

memories or

are

required,

shift

the

registers,

lower

I/O

memories

and

shift

(or obtaining additional)

bits,

timers and counters.

This corresponds to relocating the starting point of the

random. When

timer circuits from

numbers between

1600 to some other I/O

partititon.

However, because two I/O numbers are required for a timer

1600—1757 must be used, beginning at 1600, and consecu-

up through the last timer. Counters must use I/O
numbers greater than the last timer, and up through 1757.

memory, the gain (or loss) of retentive memories is always

tively

counter,

and

only

one

required

for a

double the loss (or gain) of timers and counters.

3-1

retentive

The internal I/O groupings that can be achieved are shown
in

Table 3-2. Quantities of timers and counters are gained

lost,

multiples of

sacrificing

retentive

memories and shift register bits, in multiples of

16.

or increasing

Table 3-1
Typical Assignment of Internal I/O Numbers

I/O No.

Comment

Use

1400

Retentive memory

1401

Retentive memory

1402

1403

Shift register

Random retentive memories

1404

and shift registers

1450

Retentive memory

1451

Retentive memory

1452

Retentive memory

Shift register

Adjustable I/O partition

Timer
Timer

Timers used consecutively

1670
1671

}

Timer — spare

}

Timer — spare

1672
Several timers left as

spares

1676
1677

)

Timer — spare

}

Counter

}

Counter

1700
1701

1702
1703

Event counters

1757
1760

Counter

4 up/down counters
1777

3-2

up/down counters

Table 3-2
Possible Internal Function Groupings

Quantity

Retentive Memories

Timers

Up/Down

(First Timer

Shift Register Bits

Counters

Circuit)

I/O Partition

120

1400

112

32
48
64
80
96

104

1420
1440

112
128*
144
160
176
192

208
224
240

1460

88
80
72
64
56
48
40
32
24

1500

1520
5140
1560
1600
1620
1640
1660
1700
1720
1740
1760

4
4
4

4
4

'Normal grouping as shipped by Digital Equipment Corporation.

RETENTIVE MEMORIES
memory

Retentive

HEAD ADVANCE

circuits

replace

latching

relays

recording operations or status when power failures occur.

HEAD RETURNED

All outputs (I/O

are cleared

numbers between 1000-1377 inclusive)
when the Industrial 14 loses power. Retentive

memory outputs having I/O numbers between 1400-1577
inclusive,

however, are not cleared and retain the previous

retentive

memory circuit in

LS2

RTMEM1

1400

RTMEM1

RETRACT HEAD

1400

state when the Industrial 14 is powered up again.

The

FULL DEPTH REACHED

LSI

for

LOGIC TO
RETRACT HEAD

RTMEM1
1400

Figure 3-2 records the

SOLR

full-depth state of a drill-head or probe; the second circuit
retracts the

1200

head or probe upon reaching the full-depth

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

INTERNAL FUNCTION

LSI

SOLR (200

LS2

RTMEMt 1400

position.

1400 » + 1400 */2)
1200 = 1400 » LOGIC TO RETRACT HEAD
1

NOTE

(

A retentive memory may be programmed to
clear in the event of a

"Non-Retentive

(

)

power shutdown. Refer

Internal

Functions"

pre-

Figure 3-2 Retentive Memory Circuit and Boolean Equations

sented later in this chapter.

to Record Full-Depth Reached

3-3

SHIFT REGISTERS

The shift register bits can be formed either from a series of

The Industrial 14 allows any consecutive group of external
outputs (I/O numbers 1000-1377) or internal functions
(normally I/O numbers 1400-1577) to be used as a shift

retentive

cleared

memories or from unused outputs; however, in

instance

either

Because the

they

shift

must form a consecutive group.

comprised of individual I/O

numbers, a circuit may be designed to parallel-load into any

When external outputs are used, the shift register is
whenever the Industrial 14 is shut down. When

position of the shift register.

internal functions are used, the shift register holds its state

numerous applications. One

during an Industrial 14 shutdown. (Internal I/O numbers
may also be used for a non-retentive shift register. Refer to

example is in identifying parts in a manufacturing transfer

"Non-Retentive Internal Functions".)

operation - either for acceptance testing or for performing

Shift registers are useful for

an additional operation. As each part is transferred to a new
shifted. Figure 3-3

The shift circuit transfers the data from each location to

station, a corresponding register bit

the next higher location (higher in terms of I/O numbers).

shows 3 circuits that keep track of parts moving through 8
stations and finally reject the part that is bad. The first

The shift occurs when the coil of the shift circuit is first
energized. The shift circuit remains energized so long as its

circuit is the shift circuit; the second loads the reject status

circuit conditions are satisfied; the next shift occurs when

into the first bit in the shift register, and the third rejects

the coil has been de-energized, then re-energized.

the bad part based on the state of the last bit in the shift
register.

SHIFT SIGNAL
SRI

PART INDEX
SOLP

1402

The Industrial 14 machine language instruction format for
the shift signal circuit differs from the format of other

1201

output or internal function
output

LOWLIM

ON when a shift

circuits.

circuit

Prior to setting an

solves.

Industrial

1420

instruction (TN) tests the shift signal output to determine if

HILIM

an OFF-to-ON transition has occurred. If so, the MOVBIT
instruction transfers the contents of the next-to-last shift

1427

SRBITI
1420

instruction

MOVBIT

transfers the contents of the next preceding

shift register location to the next-to-last location. Thus, for

PARALLEL LOAD

CLEAR FIRST

OF FIRST SHIFT

POSITION

the

AFTER SHIFT
SRI

1420

1402

SOLO
1202

SRBIT8
1427

LOGIC TO
EJECT PART

REJECT IN LAST
POSITION

OUTPUTS
SOLP
SOLO

shift

registers,

total

Industrial

N-1

MOVBIT

The following is

14 machine language for the

shift signal

TF 1201
JFN .+3

-if-

LS3

circuit just described.

SRBIT1

INPUTS

total

instructions should always be executed.

of setting

1402 ON, the

JFF .+4

Instead

SKP

program jumps to

SF 1402
JFF NEXT

ON. This checks to determine if an
OFF-to-ON transition has occurreu
and then sets 1402 ON.

test

1402 for

EJECT BAD PART

TN 1402

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

SN 1402
JFN NEXT

MOVBIT

execute MOVBIT instructions.

1201

1202

1402
SRBITI 1420
SRI

transition occurred,

1426
1427

SRBIT8 1427

1402= 1201
1420= 3+(l420-«-/l402)
1202= 1427* (Logic toeject part)

OFF-to-ON

14-0252

MOVBIT
1425

1426

Figure 3-3 Shift Register Circuit and Boolean Equations

(continued on next page)

to Track a Reject Part

3-4

MINIMUM ALLOCATION
FOR SHIFT CIRCUIT

MOVBIT

MINIMUM SHIFT
CIRCUIT SIZE
(ONE CONTACT)-,
MAXIMUM SHIFT

1420
1421

NEXT,
MAXIMUM
The circuit for 1420 in this example illustrates the general

SHIFT

form for a shift register parallel-load circuit (Figure 3-4). If

the application had called for a cancel signal to clear the

MAXIMUM SHIFT

would have appeared in series with the

CIRCUIT SIZE
(FULL 8x10 CIRCUIT); MINIMUM
SHIFT REGISTER
LENGTH, 57 BITS

shift register bit,

output.

LOAD

SRBIT

CANCEL

Figure 3-5 Industrial 14 Memory Allocation for
Shift Registers

SRBIT = /CANCEL»{ LOAD + SRBIT "/SHIFT)

Figure 3-4 General SR Parallel-Load Circuit Ladder

LOGIC TO

CAUSE SHIFT

Diagram

40 BITS

The amount of

memory required for a shift
register includes the memory locations needed for storing
controller

the shift circuit plus the locations needed for moving each

SR2

of the shift register (Figure 3-5). The total amount of

1100

bit

memory

for a shift register

locations.

is therefore limited to 256
The smaller the shift circuit, the more bits the

shift

can

include;

larger

shift

registers

possess

commensurately fewer bits. The smallest shift circuit allows
approximately 81

allows approximately 56 shift register bits.

If the

combina-

too great, this condition

SRBIT41

SRBIT40

tion of the shift circuit and the instructions for moving

each bit

BITS-^

LINK BETWEEN THE TWO
SHIFT REGISTERS

shift register bits, the largest shift circuit

1451

1450

detected when the

equation of instructions are read in BOOL-143 or PAL-143.
If

this occurs, simply break the shift register into 2 separate

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

segments.

For example, 2 shift register circuits must be used to shift

120 bits. One circuit might shift the first 40 consecutive
bits.

SR2 1100
SR3 1101

1160= (LOGIC TO

SRBIT40 1450
SRBIT41 1451

1101 =

CAUSE SHIFT)
1100

1451= 1450

The other senses the output coil of the first circuit and

14-0255

then shifts the last 81 consecutive bits (a total of 120 bits
plus

bit to link the 2 shift registers). Figure 3-6 is a ladder

Figure 3-6 Ladder Diagrams and Boolean Equations

diagram of this circuit.

to Link Two Shift Registers

3-5

TMR1

TIMERS
14 timer circuits each require two I/O numbers;

Industrial

these are usually in the range

Groupings, presented

1620

LS4
200

1600-1757 {Internal I/O
The timer circuit is

in this chapter).

programmed using the first, even numbered, I/O number.

When this I/O number (for instance, 1600) is energized, the
timer starts; when it is de-energized, the timer clears,
regardless of

whether or not the

full

MOTORI
1000

TMR1D

time interval has

1621

elapsed.

The contact for the even I/O number (1600) senses the
instantaneous state of the timer. The contact for the odd

INPUTS

LS4 200

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

OUTPUTS
MOTOR 1000

TMR1

1620

I/O number (1601) senses the delayed timed-out state, lue
states of these 2 contacts are shown in Figure 3-7. Notice

the results

1620 = 200
1000= 1621

when the timer circuit is de-energized prior to

completing the full delay.
Figure 3-8b On-Delay Timer Operation Ladder Diagram

TIMER ON
CONTROL
CIRCUIT OFF

INSTAN-

L
L

TANEOUS
CONTACT OFF

J DELAY

DELAY

Occasionally, it is useful to sense the instantaneous contact
(even number) of a timer in a lock-up (latch) circuit to turn

on an external output

given time after an

input

DELAYED
CONTACT

TOO
SHORT
I

condition is sensed. An example of this is a package on a
conveyor that passes a photoswitch and moves on to an

OFF-

A time delay must exist between the photoswitch

elevator.

detecting the package and the elevator starting to move.

The

instantaneous

energized

Figure 3-7 Timing Circuit Operation Timing

Figures

contact

maintains

even though the input

3-9a and

the

timer

coil

no longer present.

3-9b are timing and

ladder diagrams

respectively, for this example.

A timer can be used in conjunction with external outputs
to delay the turn-on of power devices, such as solenoids or

motor

shows timing

starters. Figure 3-8a

such a timer

TIMER INPUT CONDITION
PS1 (NUMBER 240) OFF

circuit. Notice that an input condition starts the timer and

the timed-out state turns on output 1000. Figure 3-8b is a
ladder diagram of the circuit.

INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT TMR2

ON
OFF

(NUMBER 1640) OFF
TIMER INPUT CONDITION
LS4 (NUMBER 0200)

ON
OFF

INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT TMR1

(NUMBER 1620)

OFF

TIMED OUT CONTACT
TMR1D (NUMBER 1621)

OFF

OUTPUT CIRCUIT

a CONTACT MOTORI
(NUMBER 1000)

OFF

J
J

Tl MIN(3

PERIOD

L
L
L
L

TIMED OUT CONTACT
TMR2D (NUMBER 1641) OFF

OUTPUT CIRCUIT
SOLR (NUMBER 1200) Qpp

Figure 3-9a Timer Lockup Circuit Timing

Timers are also used in applications to extend the ON time
of an output (Figures 3-1 Oa and 3-1 Ob) or to set an output

ON for a given time after de-energizing an input (Figures
3-1 la and 3-1 lb).

Figure 3-8a Turn-On Delay Circuit Timing

3-6

DELAYED CONTACT

RAISE ELEVATOR

requires a higher I/O

number than the highest timer I/O

number. Two control circuits with consecutive numbers are
required for each event counter: the even numbered circuit

increments the counter when set ON and the odd numbered
circuit clears the counter when energized. Increments that

occur while the clear circuit

ON have no effect on the

counter.

LS5
220

TMR3

SOLT
1050

1650

3»-

SOLT
1050

LS5
220
INPUTS

OUTPUTS

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

240

SOLR 1200

TMR2 1640
TMR2D 1641

PS1

SOLT

TMR3D

1050

1651

1200 = 1641 + (1200 LOGIC TO TURN OFF ELEVATOR)
1640= 240 + (1640 « /1200)

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

220

SOLT 1050

TMR3 1650
TMR3D 1651

LS5
Figure 3-9b Timer Lockup Circuit Ladder Diagram

and Boolean Equations

1650 = /220 » 1050
1050= 220 + 1050 * /1651
(

LS5 INPUT 220)

Figure 3-10b

3FF
OFF

INSTANTANEOUS
CONTACT TMR3

OUTPUT CIRCUIT
SOLT (NUMBER 1050)

and Boolean Equations

•

TIMING
PERIOD

TIMER INPUT CONDITION
LS6 (NUMBER 250)

°^

OFF

ON
OFF

INSTANTANEOUS ON
CONTACT TMR4
(NUMBER 1660) OFF

°^
TIMED OUT CONTACT
TMR4D (NUMBER 1661) Qpp

14-0261

Figure 3-10a

OFF Delay Timer Circuit Ladder Diagram

(NUMBER 1650) OFF

TIMED OUT CONTACT
TMR3D (NUMBER 1651)

)

TIMING
PERIOD
.

OFF Delay Timer Circuit Timing
ON
"'^
STORAGE
\GE OUTPUT CIRCUIT
1CR (NUMBER 1377) ^pp
OFF-

Another timer application is in energizing an output for a

Figures 3-1 la and 3-1

OUTPUT CIRCUIT
SOLU (NUMBER 1060) Qpp

b respectively.

EVENT COUNTERS
counters

'^^

fixed interval following de-energization of an input. The
timing and ladder diagrams for this application are shown in

Event

Figure 3-1 la Circuit Timing for Energizing an Output

(up-count

1600-1757 with timer

only)

circuits;

I/O

numbers

for a Fixed Interval Following De-energization

however, each counter

of an Input

3-7

INCREMENT COUNTER
CTRI
1700

BAD PART DETECTED
LS7

^==>r
COUNT
0001

PRESET
0003
GOOD PART DETECTED
LS8
10

CLEAR COUNTER
C LCTR

1701

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

LS6 250

SOLU 1060

TMR4 1660
TMR4D 1661

1CR 1377

CLCTR1

1003

LOGIC TO

OPERATE
STATION

OUTPUTS

INPUTS
LS7
LS8

Figure 3-1 lb Circuit and Boolean Equations to Energize
an Output for a Fixed Interval After De-energization

contact

the

up-counter

M0T0R2

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

1003

1700
CLCTR1 1701
CTRI

1700=7
1701 =10

1003=/1701 » (LOGIC TO OPERATE STATION)

of an Input

odd-numbered

OPERATE STATION
M0T0R2

1701

1060=/250 1377
1377= 250 + (1377«/1661)
1660=/250 « 1060

The

COUNT LESS
THAN THREE

senses

Up Counter Circuit and Boolean Equations
Parts
to Shut Down a Station on Three Successive Bad

whether the count equals or exceeds the preset count. This

Figure 3-12

sensed contact can be used in parallel or in series with other

contacts within control circuits.
Figure 3-12 is an example of an up-counter to shut down a
station after three successive bad parts are detected. Notice

A typical up/down counter application is in limiting parts
on a conveyor. In the following example (Figure 3-13), the
contact (1760) senses whether or not six parts are in a
particular conveyor zone. If six parts are on the conveyor, a
gate is activated to prevent additional parts from entering.

that the normally closed contact (1701) senses whether the

number of

parts

operation if the count

than 3 and stops the station

less
is

3 or more.

UP/DOWN COUNTERS
The

Industrial 14's selection of internal functions always

includes

up/down

counters.

These

counters

CASCADING A TIMER AND COUNTER

are

A timer interval greater than 999 seconds can be obtained

permanently assigned the I/O numbers listed in Table 3-3.
Up/Down Counters are programmed using 3 I/O numbers;

by cascading a timer with a counter. The preset value of
each can be determined with the following equation:

the first to increment, the second to clear, and the third to
decrement the counter. The fourth I/O number is not

TOTAL ELAPSED TIME = (TIMER PRESET VALUE) X

available for use.

(COUNTER PRESET VALUE)

Contacts for the first I/O number (1760, 1764, 1770, and
1774) are used in other control circuits to indicate that the

For example,

preset value has been reached. Contacts for the second I/O
number (1761, 1765, 1771, and 1775) are used to test for a

1-hour (3600 second) timer

desired,

preset the timer to 60 seconds and the counter to 60. This

example is illustrated in Figure 3-14.

zero counter value.

3-8

Table 3-3

Up/Down Counters
Function

As An Output

I/O Number

Counter

As A Contact

1760

Count up

= Preset

1761

Clear

1762

Count down

1763

Do not use

N/A
N/A

ENTERING PHOTOCELL

INCREMENT COUNTER
CTR2

PS2

1760

1764

Count up

= Preset

1765

Clear

1766

Count down

1767

Do not use

N/A
N/A

1770

Count up

= Preset

1771

Clear

LOGIC TO

1772
1773

Count down

N/A
N/A

CLEAR
COUNTER

Do not use

COUNT
0003
PRESET
0006

CLEAR COUNTER

CLCTR2
1761

Count up

= Preset

1775

Clear

1776
1777

Count down
Not used in

N/A

1774

LEAVING PHOTOCELL
PS3

DECREMENT COUNTER

Initialize

Counter

DECTR2
1762

NON-RETENTIVE INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

OFF

Although

all

Industrial

14 loses power, all internal functions normally

external output circuits turn

retain the current state or value during and after a

the

CTR2
1760

power

This means, for example, that a timer which

failure.

1205

LOGIC TO
ACTIVATE
GATE

interrupted part way through its interval by a shut-down of

the

14 will continue (not reset) when power
However, the Industrial 14 has an I/O number
(1777) which acts as a system initialize signal to reset
Industrial

returns.

timing or to initiate some special action when the Industrial

ACTIVATE GATE
SOLG

CONVEYOR FULL

powered

first

initialize"

up.

(INITIALIZE)

This contact designated
is

OFF

following

i.e.,

one that

resets

initialize

SOLG

12
13

1205

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

CTR2 1760
CLCTR2 1761
DECTR2 1762

1760 = 12
1761 = (LOGIC TO CLEAR COUNTER)
1762 •13
1205 • 1760 » (LOGIC TO ACTIVATE GATE)

memory and ON thereafter. If a pneumatic type timer is
normally open, not

OUTPUTS

PS2
PS3

"not

power

shutdown for the first pass through Industrial 14 Controller
desired,

INPUTS

with a power failure, the
(1777)

contact should be
Figure 3-13

programmed in series with the control circuit (Figure 3-15).

Up/Down Counter Circuit and Boolean

Equation Parts on a Conveyor to a Maximum of Six

To make a shift register non-retentive, a circuit must be
entered for each bit (Figure 3-16).

3-9

TIMER
CONTROL

SECONDS TIMER
(PRESET VALUE

CLEAR

60.0)

TIMER

OVERFLOW
INCREMENTS
COUNTER

MINUTE COUNTER
(PRESET VALUE
=

CLEAR

G0)

OVERFLOW

HOUR

TIME OUT

RESET_TIMER_WHEN_
COUNTtK INCKtMtNlb

TMR5
1600

LOGIC TO
START TIMING

INITIALIZE

TIMER

CTR3
1700

TIMER
1662

1777

TIME.1
100

LOGIC FOR
TIME DELAY

PRESET
600

TIMED OUT

CTR3

TMR5D

1700

COUNT
INCREMENT

1601

COUNT
020

Figure 3-15 Clear Timer if Power is Lost Ladder Diagram

PRESET

060
SOLZ
1

1100

HOUR DELAY
INITIATE

CLCTR3
1701

1500

INITIALIZE
1777

1500

CLCTR3
OPERATION
STARTED

CLEAR
COUNT

1701

OUTPUTS

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

SOLZ ilOO

TMR5 1600
TMR5D 1601
CTR3 1700
CLCTR3 1701

1600 =1700 « (LOGIC
1700 = 1601
1100=1701
1701 '{OPERATION

w J Mn
I

Figure 3-16 Circuit to Clear One Bit of a Shift Register

on Power Failure

STARTED)

Figure 3-14 Circuit and Boolean Equations to Cascade
a 60 Second Timer With a 60 Minute Counter

3-10

CHAPTER 4
BOOL-143 CONTROL EQUATION
TRANSLATOR
Control equations, written with symbols similar to Boolean
notation

are

translated

using

BOOL-143, the Control

Equation Translator, into the Industrial 14 machine code
instructions

equations

presented

constitutes

Chapter

4-3

Detected

(Errors

and

Diagnosed

not flag Boolean equations
with circuit diagrams too wide or too high for display on
will

A series of these

the VT14 screen. Examples of these two types of equations

are explained later in this Chapter. Circuits with too
many

Industrial

Table

BOOL-143). BOOL-143

program.

The

program of control equations is prepared using the Editor

nested variable groups should be avoided.

and a "source program paper tape" is generated. Use of the
Editor
easily

enables the source program to be corrected and
revised during the stages of

BOOL-143

reads

the

translates (compiles)

machine-code

source

program development.

program

paper

tape

BOOL-143 STATEMENT

and

The body of BOOL-143 source programs

the equations into an Industrial 14

program

containing

the

instructions

1010=(1 +2)* 3

The programming procedure used with BOOL-143 is shown
Figure 4-1.

Each

The importance of correcting errors in the

source program with the Editor cannot be overemphasized.

4-1;

Industrial

14 program prepared by
with

4-1).

this

The

(Figure

However,

VT14 format. A

the

format

has

special

(

)) signals BOOL-143 that the

table

includes

all

legal

BOOL-143

characters.

characters

SPACE, TAB, LINE FEED, and

FORM

FEED may be included in BOOL-143 programs to format
the source program. These characters are ignored during
processing by BOOL-143. Blank leader/trailer (null) tape is

the

BOOL-143 must be
yes (y)

equation

later in this chapter.

into the

14 and debugged using the VT14 Programming

control

Functional descriptions of these characters are presented

VT14 COMPATIBILITY
Industrial

the

complete source statement has been read. The acceptable
equation characters and the use of each are listed in Table

changes must be made to the system and an accurate
representation of the program is not available.

Terminal

BOOL-143. For example, the nonprinting

carriage return character

program, in equation form, throughout the life of the
system. Failure to do this can result in many lost hours if

The output tape from BOOL-143 can be read

character

meaning to

The user should maintain a current, correct version of the

compatible

a series of

Chapter 2.

control equations such as the following:

also ignored by BOOL-143. All characters other than these
formatting characters and the characters listed in Table 4-1

response to

BOOL-143 query, VT14-NY?, enables BOOL-143 to flag
(E69) certain VT14 incompatible commands and generates

are

illegal

portion

one NOP instruction between each Boolean equation. These

and cause errors
the

BOOL-143

included

source

the statement

program.

All

illegal

nonprinting characters are replaced by a question mark (?)

incompatible commands are listed under Error Number 69

in the

4-1

BOOL-143 listing.

output or an internal function is determined by the state of
inputs, outputs, and internal functions. For example, a

ASSIGN INPUTS
AND OUTPUTS TO
INDUSTRIAL 14
I/O CONVERTERS
AND INTERNAL
I/O GROUPINGS

single

output number (1017 for instance)

the left-hand

member of an equation, while the right-hand member of the
equation

combination of inputs, outputs, and internal

functions. These inputs, outputs, or internal functions are

combined as variables of an equation using the operators

EXPRESS THE
MACHINE

SEQUENCE

described in the next paragraph.

EQUATION FORM

READ SOURCE
TAPE BACK
INTO EDITOR

TYPE THE
EQUATIONS IN
PROGRAM FORM
WITH EDITOR

To be compatible with old BOOL- 14, users can also express
X0-X777, outputs as Y0-Y377 or
inputs
as
Y1000-Y1377, and internal functions as Y400-Y777 or
I
4uU— till.
I

CORRECT
THE PROGRAM
ERRORS

Operators

The BOOL-143 operators are * (Boolean AND), (Boolean
OR, inclusive), and / (Boolean NOT). These operators
-t-

GENERATE THE
SOURCE TAPE
FOR BOOL- 143

internal function values to

combine input, output, and

determine the value of an output or internal function.

COMPILE THE
INDUSTRIAL 14
PROGRAM WITH
BOOL-143

Thus, the equation:

1017= 1017*/4-i-23
YES

1017

output

means that

set

the

following

conditions are satisfied:

Output 1017 is already ON and input 4 is not

ON, or

LOAD THE
COMPILED PROGRAM PAPER
TAPE INTO THE
INDUSTRIAL 14
USING ODP-143
OR THE VT14

Input 23 is ON; otherwise, 1017 is set OFF.

PROGRAMMING

The

equation

NOTE

TERMINAL

conditions

output.

OFF

and

Specifically,

the

output is set ON

the conditions are satisifed

otherwise

(true);

YES

for

the

specifies

are false).

The

set

OFF (the conditions

fact that an output is set OFF

the conditions are not satisfied

when
always

expressed

explicitly,

but

not

always

implied in a BOOL-143 equation.

GENERATE
PAPER TAPE FOR
DOCUMENTATION
Figure 4-1

The

(/)

can

negate the sense of single

variables or variable groups. For example the equation:

BOOL-143 Programming Procedure

1021 = 12-1- /31

meansthat output 1021 is set ON if:

Input, Output, and Internal Function Specification
Particular input and output numbers are determined by the
selection of the input (or output) converters. These are
octal

NOT operator

Input 12 is ON, or

numbers between 0-777, and 1000-1377. Internal

functions

stored

the

Industrial

14's

memory

are

Input 31

OFF.

designated by octal numbers 1400-1777. The state of an

4-2

OFF; otherwise output 1021 is set

Table 4-1

Variable Groups

BOOL-143 Equation Characters

Input and output variables can be grouped with either
parentheses or square brackets. (The square bracket ([)

Character

Meaning/Use

SHIFT/K and (]

)

SHIFT/M on the Teletype keyboard.)

For example:
Input numbers

1000-1377

1012 = (12

-I-

13) *

[27+1015].

Square brackets and parentheses are treated identically by

BOOL-143 and are available for the user's convenience in

Y1000-Y1377[.

distinguishing

Output numbers

between

variable

groups;

however,

BOOL-143 requires that these symbols be used in pairs.
Any grouping opened with a square bracket must also be

Y0-Y377

closed with a square bracket. For example:

1400-1777

1012= (12+ 13] * [27+1015)

Y1400-Y1777

Internal function numbers

will

Y400-Y777

generate an error because each grouping is closed with

the wrong bracket type.

Equation indicator

Boolean

The equations:

R operator

1012= (12+ 13) * [27+1015]
Boolean AND operator

and

1013= (22+ 1017* [42+3]
/

variable or a variable group)

(,[

Start of a variable group

),]

End of a variable group

Statement Continuation
Extremely long equations which do not fit on one line in
the source program can be broken into two or more parts

Repetitive equation indicator

the dollar sign

($)

as the statement continuation

character. Each incomplete line

Repetitive variable indicator

equation

0-9

are in proper form.

using

)

Boolean NOT (negates a single

with the Editor,

Identify specific repetitive

terminated with a $. The

part of a source program paper tape generated

which the user has typed a carriage
$ on the source tape. Whenever a $

equations or variables.

return

Indicates start of repetitive

carriage return as an end of statement indicator.

equation

provides a new input line and accepts additional characters

after

the

precedes a carriage return,

BOOL-143 does not treat the
It

simply

until it encounters a carriage return not preceded by a

Comment indicator
Line break indicator

For Example:
Control statement indicator

RETURN

1021 =/(1+2 + 3) * [(4+ [5*6]
+1012* (27 + 5 + /21)

End of statement (often represented by "

The

TAB

77]$

dollar sign/carriage return

Formatter, converted to 8 spaces

anywhere within the statement

or less

statement rules are followed.

4-3

combination can be used
line;

otherwise, all other

Intermediate Results

Comments
Program comments are text lines included in the BOOL-143

document the program

set of inputs energizes or de-energizes

Comments are merely

general.

typed by BOOL-143 as they appear in the source program.

comments have no

The

affect

on the

code

machine

many instances, the storage of an intermediate result is

required within Industrial 14 programs. For example, one

source program to clarify the function of an equation or to

Control Relay

1; a

second set of inputs energizes or de-energizes Control Relay
de-energizes Control
2; and a third set of inputs energizes or
3. These control relays are then used in various
combinations with other inputs and outputs to control

generated for an equation.

Relay

BOOL-143 comments must be preceded by a semicolon {;).
When a semicolon is encountered, all characters to the right
can be
are treated as a comment. Any Teletype character
can
character
This
included in the comment except the $.
line.
Any
one
than
be used to write comments on more

Solenoids A, B, and C. The following are three possible
approaches for controlling such functions:

Complete coding

- Control equations are written,

within which, the variables that determine the state
of the control relay are substituted for the control

characters to the right of the $ are ignored by BOOL-143.

relay. Thus, the equation for each solenoid separately
tests the control relay inputs to determine the state

For Example:

1015 = 1 + 2* (3-I-/4)

and the actual control relays are

solenoid

of the

eliminated from the system.

SOLA = PB1 + PB2* (LS13$
-H/LS14)

Z-functions - A Z-function is written to solve for the

;LS14TRIPPED WHEN SLIDE IS FULL FORWARD.

state previously represented
In this example the first

Industrial

comment is broken into two lines

by a control relay. (No

14 output is set by the Z-function.) The

solenoid equations can then contain Z-functions as

using the $.

14 instructions is
needed in solving for each Z-function. These same
instructions are used to solve for every output which

variables. Only one set of Industrial

NOTE
BOOL-143 can handle approximately 160 input
characters

(equation

statement.

this

comment)

and

maximum

contains the Z as an equation variable.

one

exceeded,

Storage outputs

BOOL-143 types:

written

BUFFER OVERFLOW
If

the

within

occurs

overflow

buffer

comment,

should be ignored.

which

— A normal output equation is

sets

an unwired output or internal

function ON or OFF. These outputs can then be used

as variables in other equations.

occurs

an equation, the equation must be

divided using a Z-function, as described later in
this chapter, and recompiled.

NOTE
Before

Subroutine

Z-functions solve for an intermediate value or
result. A Z-function does not directly turn an

Z-Functions

output ON

whenever they are needed in normal output equations.
They do not set an output to record the result of the
testing; instead, the result is recorded by setting the

R-functions

function

Z-functions

or OFF; rather, it is part of a larger

solve

state.

for

an output or internal

R-functions

are

identical

Industrial

are

repetitive

variables

equations.

exist for solving for the output more than once

were compiled by BOOL-143:

BOOL-143

(specifically, R-

1001 =1*(21 -H3*/42-i-1017*11)
1002= 2* (21 -H3*/42+ 1017* 11)

program can contain 64
and Z-functions) for each 4K field of the

1003= 3* (21 H3*/42-H017* 11)
1004=4* (21 -US* /42 1017* 11)
-I-

Industrial

14 program.

4-4

solved

many different

For example, suppose the following equations

normal output equations except that provisions

subroutines

are

14 TEST flag ON or OFF. Z-functions usually

represent values which must be solved

which

on each pass through the program.

Jump

BOOL-143 equations:

equation which does perform this function.

review

Instructions in Chapter 2.

SUBROUTINES AND STORAGE OUTPUTS
Subroutines serve two functions

proceeding,

This set of equations would cause
Industrial

BOOL-143 to generate

14 machine codes to test each variable for each

Many of the instructions would be the same for
four outputs; specifically, those instructions which test

equation.
all

the state of the variables vyithin parentheses.

the following group of equations with a considerable saving
the

number

memory

locations

JMR is executed.
The

The same machine control function can be represented by
in

input 377 must be in one of the two states, one of the tests
must be true and the TEST flag is therefore set before the

required for

the

program.

instructions for solving equations which contain
Z-functions differ greatly from the original equations. In
place of the instructions which test variables in the

Z-function,
BOOL-143 generates a JMS (jump to
subroutine) to the beginning location of the subroutine that

The subroutine returns to the main
program with the result shown by the TEST flag. The main
solves the Z-function.

Z1 = 21 + 13*/42+ 1017* 11

program

1001 =1*Z1

instruction; thus,

1002 = 2*Z1

similar to a test instruction.

then

tests

the

with

result

JMS

JFF

instructions serve

or
a

JFN

purpose

1003 = 3*Z1

1004=4*Z1

Instead of testing a single variable, the logical combination

of a group of variables is tested and the result is stored

The new form is analogous to a control relay in a ladder

the TEST flag.

network which represents the combined state of a group of
inputs (Z1). The contacts from the relay are then included
in

the

circuits

for

solenoids,

motor

starters,

etc.

The

Industrial
14 accommodates only one level of
subroutines; therefore, a subroutine cannot contain a JMS

The

number following Z is arbitrary and can be any decimal
number between 0-2047. The Z-function must be defined

instruction. In terms of BOOL-143, this means that
a
Z-function cannot contain another Z-function as a variable

only once per memory field. It can be referenced as many

times as necessary from that same field.

written as a storage output and tested with a TN or
TF
instruction in the subroutine, as described later in this

Given

chapter.

this

group of equations, BOOL-143 generates the

series of instructions to establish

equation.

second

level

needed,

must be

Z1 as a subroutine. The

Z1 instruction tests the inputs as a normal output equation
would; however, no actual output is set. The subroutine

R-Functions
R-functions (repetitive equations) are subroutines which set
an output ON or OFF (as opposed to Z-functions which set

TEST flag ON if the equation is true; otherwise, it
sets the TEST flag OFF. BOOL-143 then tests the state of
the TEST flag to determine the result of the subroutine.
sets the

the TEST flag). Characteristically, R-functions are outputs

which

must be checked often and cannot wait for a
complete memory cycle. The state of these outputs could

The subroutine instructions for a Z-function are terminated
in

its

the following manner (compared to the termination of a

determined

simply

compiling

the

complete

instruction sequence to solve the equation in several places

normal equation):

the source program. This technique is inefficient if the

same equation
Z-function

is
solved more than once. Defining an
R-function causes BOOL-143 to generate the equation as a

Normal equation

Test and

subroutine. Whenever the output state is to be determined,

BOOL-143
*

conditional

jump

TN 377
TF377
JMR
the result of the Z-function

JMS

(jump

subroutine)

ON or OFF.

Thus, the instructions to solve the equation are stored in
only one area in memory, but are executed as many times

instructions

generates

instruction to the R-function to set the output

SN output
SKP

as necessary.

SF output
is

not true,

An R-function is defined as having the following form:

BOOL-143

Rn:

m= 1*

generates a JFF or JFN instruction that jumps past the TN

377 and TF 377 to the JMR, thereby returning with the
TEST flag OFF. If the result of the Z-function is true, the
TN 377 and TF 377 instructions are executed. Because

where n

any decimal number between 0-2047 and m

specifies a specific output or internal function to set by the

subroutine.

4-5

The subroutine

referenced by writing the R-function

Z8= 21*1007

Error;

designation. For example, the following statement defines

already

an R-function to set output 1053:

field.

variables

BOOL-143 generates the machine code
solving this equation for

1053

has

function

defined

been

this

Error; the R-functions cannot be

1001 =21+R8

R32: 1053= 32* (41 + 12* 1013) + 21

the

equations.

(Only

Z-functions may.)

instructions for

the same form as for a

R21:1010=Z1*17

normal output equation.

Error;

R-function

Z-function

contain

variable. (A subroutine cannot

BOOL-143 compiles a

After the set output instructions,

cannot

jump to another subroutine.)

.IMR Instruction as follows:

Z1 = 1+31*1021

Z2=3*(2r31)+Z1

the

equation

for

Z-function

cannot

contain

Error;

SN 1053
SKP

another

Z-function.
cannot jump

SF 1053

subroutine

JMR

another subroutine)

(A
to

1012= 12*(13+15)

Whenever the R-function is solved in the main program, the
user writes the following statement In the source program.

R14:1012= 15+1013

Error; definition of

Z-functions

R32

all

R- and

must precede any

output equations.

BOOL-143

compiles

then

JMS

instruction

the
Storage outputs are designated as unused output numbers

subroutine which solves for 1053.

or retentive
all

beginning

defined

following

the

output
an

the

equation).

source program

Any

following

instance)

generates an error.

(not

storage output

Z-function

R- or

(1001

set,

however, it can be tested with the

14 TN and TF instructions. A retentive memory
an
will hold its state if power to the controller is lost;
loss.
unused output will clear on a power
Industrial

4 for
Each R- or Z-function must

output equation

defined

programmed exactly as other outputs except that these
outputs do not drive solenoids, motor starters, etc. Once a

R- and Z-functions must be

In the following examples,

memory outputs of the Industrial 14 and are

possess a unique decimal-identifying number.

using

storage

outputs to record the test

result,

the

SUBROUTINE EXAMPLES

instructions required for solving the result are executed
only once for each pass through the program. The storage

R 1 3: 1 006 = 2+4

output

;Def ines the subroutine

itself

can then be tested whenever

However, subroutines must be executed

needed.

at each instance

that the result is required In an output equation.

Storage outputs can also be tested by a subroutine. Thus, if
one intermediate result is a function of another, a storage

R13

References

the

equivalent to writing

output could

subroutine,

be used to record the second

previously stated, a subroutine cannot jump

1006= 2 +

result.

to a second

subroutine.

A storage output must be used in place of a subroutine

Z8= 2+4*1007

whenever the control function
equation, (a latched function).

Z9= 31+4+12

4-6

itself

an element of the

The equation to establish a storage output is of the form:

Partition .PRTN = nnnn
The partition control statement enables the user to increase
(or decrease) the number of retentive memories and shift

1333 = 23*21 + 1017

bits

by decreasing (or increasing) the number of

where output 1333 corresponds to a non-existent output

timers

and

event counters available. The

converter. The result is tested by including the output as a

partition, set at

variable in an equation.

first

Industrial 14
1600 when the unit is shipped, defines the
I/O number at which timers and counters may be

designated. This partition

For example,

switches

within

the

may be changed by adjusting

Industrial

Control

This

unit.

adjustment must be specified to BOOL-143 by entering a

1016= 1333+(3+5 + 7).

.PRTN = nnnn (where nnnn is an octal number ranging
from 1400-1760, in multiples of 20 I/O numbers). This

BOOL-143 then generates a TN 1333 instruction to solve

partition statement must be entered at the beginning of the

this equation for 1016.

Industrial

14 program and should not be changed anywhere

within the program. An example of a partition statement is:

CONTROL STATEMENTS
statements

Control

affect

during

compilation

generated by

are

PRTN 1520

BOOL-143 which

directions to

machine code

the

either

instructions

generated

output tape

where 1520 indicates the I/O number at which timers or

BOOL-143. Specifically, control statements

counters may be designated. Table 3-2 indicates that there

affect the allocation of

the

affect

binary

memory locations for BOOL-143

are

generated Industrial 14 program instructions and mark the

retentive

memories or

shift register

bits

and 80

timers or counters available.

end of source program tapes.
Timer Preset .SEC mmm and .TSEC mmm
Shift Circuits .SR

The .SR

Timers can be preset in seconds or tenths of seconds. The

mmmm, nnnn.

equation is a shift circuit with consecutive shift register bits

equation. The preset value is a decimal number from 1-999

from mmmm to nnnn.

The

shift

circuit

seconds

and

shift

may consist of

bits

0.1-99.9

seconds.

I/O

numbers

from

1600-1757 must be preset as timers, beginning at 1600,
and at every consecutive even I/O number, up through the

numbers 1000-1377) or internal
functions (normally, I/O numbers 1400-1577). A control
external

mmm

or .TSEC mmm, control statement
should be entered on the line preceding its associated timer

timer preset, .SEC

control statement designates that the following

outputs (I/O

last

timer; otherwise, these I/O

numbers are assumed to be

up-counters. Two examples of timer presets follow:

statement to establish a shift register is of the form:

Timer Preset

Explanation

.SR 1501, 1517

1460=200*/370+ 1460
The amount of memory required to store a shift register
consists

the

memory

locations

equation, plus the locations to

store

the

shift

move each bit of the shift

can

be.

approximately

The

smallest

shift

equation

bits;

the

shift

allows

largest

to be stored

R- and Z-functions defined

the Industrial

provides a

.FLD statement and stores the remainder of the

referenced.
0,

BOOL-143

mmm

number from 1-999. All counter equations must use a
number than any timer and only the even I/O
number of a counter equation should be preset. An
example of a counter preset follows:

must be

Field

overflows

Field

30.5 seconds

higher I/O

Field 1, and

program

Timer 1602 is preset to

mmm

redefined

Field

.TSEC 305
1602= 1060*/250

must be entered on the line preceding its associated
counter equation. The counter preset value is a decimal

.FLD
BOOL-143 can store the program in either Field Oor Field
1. The .FLD control statement notifies BOOL-143 that the
all

360 seconds

The event and up/down counter preset statement .CNTR

Field 1

remainder of the program

Timer 1600 is preset to

1600 = 200* 1600*/1 000

Counter Preset .CNTR

shift

equation allows approximately 56 shift register bits.

that

.SEC 360

Counter Preset

Explanation

.CNTR 25
1760 = 6*1020

Up/down counter 1 760 is preset to 25

automatically

program in Field 1.

4-7

End of Program - .END or .ENDN
Each BOOL-143 source program must be terminated with
an END or ENDN statement to indicate the end of
compilation. The .END statement completes the BOOL-143

When BOOL-143 encounters an .EOT statement it types
"EOT" and halts the computer system, allowing the user to
load the paper tape reader with the next tape. Pressing the

CONT switch permits the compilation to proceed.

program by compiling a CLRPC instruction.
For example,

The .ENDN
terminate

instruction

(end-no-jump)

statement

program

incomplete

may

where

be used to

.END 50

Error-no value allowed
CLRPC Generated

.END
.ENDN

CLRPC

.ENDN 50

Error-no value allowed

on three tapes, the end of

CLRPC
.EOT ^

Tape 1 is terminated by an .EOT
statement.

source program, but generates no machine code instruction.
Examples of .END and .ENDN statements follow:
Instruction Generated

the tapes is as follows:

needed. This statement marks the end of the

Statement

the program

.EOT ^

Tape 2 is also terminated by an

.EOT statement.

.END ^

Tape 3 is terminated by an .END or
an ENDN statement.

Memory Allocation
800L-143 compiles all subroutines (R- and Z-functions) as
the first elements of the program. This allows BOOL-143 to

Nongenerated

generate

JMS

instructions to these subroutine locations

from the main program. BOOL-143 places a JMP to the
start of the main program which follows the subroutines

End of Tape - .EOT
The BOOL-143 source tape can be physically segmented,
but
using the .EOT (end of tape) statement, to terminate all
be
must
the last paper tape in a series. The last segment

immediately before the subroutines.

An example of memory assignment follows:

terminated with an .END or .ENDN statement.

Location assigned

by BOOL-143

Content

JMP

The JMP instruction goes to the first instruction

231

of the first output equation (in this case 1012).

Z15

The Z- and R-function definitions can be in any
order and can be assigned any decimal number
less than, or equal to 2047.

15
16

R29
31

Z5
57

215

216

R42

4-8

230
231

Once the first output equation is encountered,
further R- or Z-function definitions cause errors.

1012
247

250

1013

263
264

1016
275

1720

1723
1735

1736

7760

Program overflows into Field 1

Location assigned

by BOOL- 143

1:0005

1:0006

1:0056

1:0250

1:0300
1:0301

The program was terminated by an .END
statement, causing a CLRPC, which changes
the location to 0:0000

4-9

BOOL-143 assigns generated machine code instructions to
consecutive memory locations, beginning witli location 0.
The first instruction of a new equation is assigned to the
next sequential memory location after the previous
equation. This sequential assignment does not provide space
for changes with

ODP-143. The .LOC, .FIXS and .VARS

Spacing Between Equations - .FIXS or .VARS

BOOL-143 is directed to compile a specified number of

NOP
.FIXS

(no operation)

instructions after equations by the

.VARS

and

spacing)

(fix

spacing)

(vary

control

statement. The NOP instructions allow for program changes
in ODP-143 during debugging. For example, the statement

control statements, described later, enable the user to start
and to leave space
the program at a location other than

.FIXS 5

after each Instruction sequence.
results in five

When

equation,

compiling

BOOL-143 checks

the

number of remaining locations on the current page. If
the
insufficient Industrial 14 memory locations exist for

NOP instructions at the end of all subsequent

instruction sequences.

The value

of the .FIXS statement

can be any decimal number between 0-2047. As many
.FlXSstaterr 1^1 L J U<9 naariari r-an hp nla/H»H In 3 nmnram
I

machine code instructions to solve the equation, BOOL-143
compiles

NOPs in the remaining locations of the current

The .VARS control statement affects only the equation

location of

which immediately follows it and overrides, for that one
equation, any .FIXS statement currently in effect. The

in the first

memory page and starts the equation
the next page; the NOPs are not typed as part of the listing.

.FIXS statement

The

must remember that

user

Industrial

program

execution starts in location 0. The content of the location
must control "start-up", either with
beginning with
instructions to initialize the system, or with a

JMP to an

initialize or start-up routine.

and remains

- .LOC

reinstated after each

.VARS statement

overridden by another .VARS

statement or replaced by a new .FIXS statement.

The value of .VARS is a decimal number between 0-2047.
The .VARS statement can be used to suppress the output
of

Start of Program

in effect until

NOP instructions after an equation by specifying a value

of 0:

The initial location of a program is specified by the .LOG
(location)

statement.

instructions for

the

VARSO

BOOL-143 generates machine code
locations beginning

with the value

specified by .LOG. For example:

Spacing Examples:

.LOG 50
1001 = 1+2
yields the compiled instructions:

4001

0001

2054
4002
2456

JFF

0054
0002
0056

0010
1001

3001

the equation

none

.FIXS 5

0051

TF
JFN
SN
SKP

Number of NOPs after

Statements

Z1 = (27* 100) * 13-H4

0050

0052
0053
0054
0055
0056

Equation and Control

R12: 1001 = 23* 14+0

.VARS 2

1001

1001 = 23 * Z1

R12

.FIXS 10

1002=27*3+30*2

1001

The NOP instructions are not part of the compiler listing.

NOTE

MONITORING PROVISIONS IN BOOL-143

The instructions begin in location 50. If no
.LOG statement were given, a .LOG is assumed

Using control statements,
automatically

and the first instruction is placed in location 0.

BOOL-143 can

monitoring

supply

be directed to

instructions

the

operation of the Industrial 14 System is to be monitored by

external

computer. The

More than one .LOG statement is permitted in a BOOL-143
program. The value of .LOG can be any octal number

techniques

involved

procedure

involved

between 0—7777.

instructions follows.

4-10

instructions

are

described

BOOL-143

used

Chapter

and the
9.

generate

The
these

BOOL-143 can be directed to add instructions to monitor

Example:

the transition state of an output. Specifically, instructions

can be added to monitor OFF to ON transitions, ON to
OFF transitions, or both, for any Industrial 14 output,

.MF

internal function, or R-function.

(the instructions generated include a RDBIT 1006)

1006=3*(4*5 + /10* 11)

The user chooses the RDBIT or RDMEM instruction for
monitoring. The RDBIT instruction outputs a specific
12-bit word to the monitoring computer; the word is

The .MF control statement shown has effect only for the
first following equation

determined by the Industrial 14 (Chapter 9). RDMEM is a
two-location

instruction

which

outputs

12-bit

instructions

statement

the

monitored

using

RDMEM

must supply an octal number (four

digits or less) following the .MF statement.

Monitor Transitions to ON — .MN
control

instruction, the user

specified by the user.

The .MN

output

the

word

(1006).

Example:

following

first

BOOL-143

causes

to add

output equation to

.MF 103

monitor transitions from OFF to ON. These instructions

1006=3*(4*5 + /10* 11)

word into the Industrial 14 output register
only when the output transitions from OFF to ON; no
12-bit word is loaded when the output remains the same, or
when the output transitions from ON to OFF.

(the instructions generated include a

load a 12-bit

RDMEM 0103)

Monitor All Transitions - .MFN

.MFN

The

Example:

and

OFF

12-bit

statement

control

output state

transitions in

to ON).

word

used

monitor

Instructions are added which

into the Industrial 14

all

both ON to OFF

(specifically

load a

output register on all

.MN

transition states of the output.

1005 = /2*(3+ 1005)

loaded if the output remains ON or OFF.

The output register is not

(the instructions generated include a RDBIT 1005)

Example:

Only the equation immediately following the .MN control

.MFN

statement contains the sequence of monitoring instructions.

The

instructions generated

are

described

Chapter

1007 = 21 + 15* 1005

Monitoring the Industrial 14.

(the instructions generated include two

RDBIT 1007

instructions)

the

output

instruction, the user

monitored

with

RDMEM

must supply an octal number (four

digits or less) following the .MN statement.

the output is to be monitored with

the

user

RDMEM instructions,

must supply two octal numbers following the

.MFN statement.
Example:
Example:

.MN4123
1005 = /2*(3+1005)

.MFN 2007, 1007

(instructions generated include a

the user supplies

less

RDMEM 4123)

(the instructions generated include:

RDMEM 2007 - Executed on transition to OFF
RDMEM 1007 - Executed on transition to ON)

than four digits following the

control statement, BOOL-143 assumes leading zeros.

NOTE
The first number is used in transitions to OFF
Monitor Transitions to OFF — .MF

The

(.MFN);

.MF control statement allows the user to monitor the

transition of an output from

the

transitions to

second

number

used

ON (.MFN).

ON to OFF. Instructions are

word into the output register
added which
from ON to OFF. The
changed
whenever the output is
if
transition
occurs or if the
register
not
loaded
no
output
is
transition is from OFF to ON.
load a 12-bit

Monitoring input Transitions

As previously

stated,

BOOL-143

allows

monitoring of

output states. If the user desires to monitor transition states

4-11

Table 4-2 (Cont)

of an input, he must assign a storage output to record the

state

transition

of the

states

He can then monitor

input.

the

output

storage

Summary of Control Statements

the

provide

Command

monitoring information concerning the input.

.ENDN

Example:

Control Operation

End of program — do not compile
any CLRPC instruction.

.MF

1040= 1

.SR 1560, 1565

(the instructions generated include a RDBIT 1040)

The Boolean equation on the next
whose
shift
circuit
line
is
a
consecutive shift register

In this

bits

are

from I/O number 1560-1565.

example, the transition states of output 1040 are

used to monitor the transition state of input 1. Table 4-2
provides

summary

statements and

control

.FLD

their

The following Boolean equations
will

meanings.

be stored in Field 1. All R- and

Z-functions that will continue to be

should

referenced

Table 4-2

Summary of Control Statements

Command

any

before

Control Operation

Start the

.PRTN 1660

program compilation

.VARS 30

internal

The

Partition

designating

the

timers

and

address

counters has been adjusted to I/O

location 250.

.FIXS5

function equations are translated.

starting

.LOG 250

redefined

output

number 1660.

NOPs after all

Leave 5 (decimal)

.SEC120

Preset

the

timer

equation

equations beginning with the next

referenced on the next line to 120

equation.

seconds.

.FIXS

any

Ignore

(decimal)

NOPs

statement

.TSEC 104

and leave 30

effect

currently

the

equation

for

after

Preset

the

timer

equation

referenced on the next line to 10.4
seconds.

equation only.

.CNTR 160
.MN

Monitor

the

transitions to the

.MF

Monitor

ON state.
for

Table 4-3 contains a list of all errors that can be detected

and diagnosed by BOOL-143. The error numbers are typed
under the associated equation in the form "Ennnn" where

Monitor the next equation for all
transitions.

.EOT

End

nnnn is the error number. All errors stop compilation of the
erroneous equation; BOOL-143 then proceeds to the next

interrupt

while a

new

tape

compilation

on the next

ERROR MESSAGES

transitions to the OFF state.

.MFN

referenced

line to 160 counts.

equation

the

Preset the counter (up or up/down)

equation

the

tape

compile

equation.

loaded.

.END

End

program

—

No machine code instructions are generated for erroneous

CLRPC instruction.

equations, unless they are first corrected.

4-12

Table 4-3

Table 4-3 (Cont)

Errors Detected and Diagnosed by BOOL-143

Error Number

Errors Detected and Diagnosed by BOOL-143

Cause

A required number
Z-function,

Error Number

missing after a

R-function,

Cause

The character following

control

sign {/)

negation

not valid.

statement.

Examples:
Examples:

1023 = /B1 *2

Z = 3+ 1001

1017=5*Z

The

R: 1012 = 27* 1

character

following

left

parenthesis or left bracket is not valid.

.FIXS

Example:

A non-octal digit is encountered after

1010= (R5* 2)

an .END, .LOG.

The character following an AND (*) or

number error caused by: A
decimal number greater than 2047
Illegal

following an R, Z,

.VARS, or .FIXS;

an octal number greater than

first

equation

not valid.

1012= 10* R1

second character of an
not valid. The first

character must be an octal

Examples:
*
1011 = 1 +

7777

.LOG or .END statement.

following a

The

OR (+) sign

The character following an equal sign
(=)

not valid.

number or

ay.

Example:
1021 = R1

Examples:

8=1

/Y14=27*1003

not valid.

The equal sign (=) is either missing or
is

not

Example:

the proper place within an

equation, Z-function, or

The character following a number is

1032=1/ '2

R-function.

12
Examples:

The

character

parenthesis

100

following
right

bracket

right
is

not

valid.

Y1 1 '2
10

Example:

15/ = 3

1007=12*(5+7)/*2

A variable grouping is not closed with
the character type with which

was

opened.

Examples:

an R-function or Z-function,

Examples:

[1+2)
[3 +(5* 6]

A Z-function is contained as a variable

Z29 = 3 + Z50
+1007)

RIO:

4-13

73= 1 *Z12

Table 4-3 (Cont)

Errors Detected and Diagnosed by BOOL-143

Errors Detected and Diagnosed by Bool-143

Error Number

Cause

Error Number

R-function

Z-function

The statement defines an R-function

referenced which has not been defined

or Z-function which has been defined

previously.

contains

equation

and

parentheses

brackets

Examples:

right

than

Z129=25+3* 12
Z129= 1003* 21 +5 * 12

left

parentheses and brackets.

Example:

1037= 1
16

Cause

* (2* 24 + 25] * 4)

contains

equation

parentheses

and

fewer

brackets

and Z-functions per 4K memory field.

right

than

The source program contains too
many R- and Z-functions per memory
field. The maximum is 64 R-functions

left

parentheses and brackets.

The character following a colon (:) is
not valid.

Example:

1042= 12* 2* (2* [23+17] * 14
17

Examples:

A control statement is not recognized.
48

R15:

Z5=27* 12

R29:

R5=121 + 1013* 122

Shift

equation plus locations to move each

.MZN
.MNF

bit of the shift register) is too large.

.SAZ

Partition Address

greater than

shift

(containing

Examples:

bad: (Address

760 or less than 1400, or

I/O address is not an octal multiple of

A control statement contains an illegal

character.

between

number

I/O

range

(1400-1760).
Examples:

Example:

.M#N

.PRTN 1630
.PRTN 1360

.M.N

control

statement

follows

the

one

least

Preset of counters

(GNTR) or timers

(SEC or TSEG) is greater than 999.

period {.).

.LOG statement must

Example:

precede all equations, R-functions and

.TSEG 1 200

Z-functions.

1630= 1 + (2
51

Examples:

1200)

Preset counter or timer at an address

below designated partition address.

Z12= 1 * 2
.LOG 50

Example:
21

PRTN 1640

subroutine definition is encountered

after at

least one equation has been

compiled.

Examples:

1012=3* 15

.GNTR 60

R12: 1005 = 27 * /51

1600 = 40+41 * (1200+ 1201).

4-14

Table 4-3 (Cont)

Adherence to these

Errors Detected and Diagnosed by BOOL-143

Industrial

rules

not mandatory for proper

14 operation. The rules serve only to increase the

efficiency and speed of program execution in the Industrial

Error Number

14 and provide compatibility with the VT14 programmable

Cause

controller.

Preset timer at an

up/down counter

address or at initialize address 1 777.

Rule 1 - All single variables (inputs or outputs) combined
with the same operator, should be grouped.

Example:

.SEC 60

Examples:

1760= 100+ 101 * 1001

1001 = 1+2-H(3*4*5) + 1012+15

Shift register limits bad. (Upper

address limit

I/O

should be rewritten:

lower than lower I/O

address limit).

1001 = 1 + 2+1012+ 15+ (3*4*5)

and
Example:

1012 = 3* 1007* (4+ 27+ 21) * 1005*32

.SR 1457, 1451

1400 = 200 + /370+ 1400
54

Wrong
shift

control

circuit

should be rewritten:

statements preceding

1012=3* 1007 * 1005* 32* (4+ 27+ 21).

equation. (6 .MF, .MN,

.MFN)

Rule 2

- BOOL-143 generates a test instruction for every

variable occurrence

All

Z- and R-function equations and

references,

monitoring

transition

therefore,

on the right-hand side of the equation;

equations

should

factored

eliminate

repeated variable occurrences.

commands, and statements controlling
spacing between equations (e.g., .FIXS

Examples:

and .VARS) are incompatible with the

1015 = 3* 1005+6* 1005+12* 1005+1017+1005

VT14.
should be rewritten:

Examples:

.MF

1015= 1005 * (3+6+ 12+ 1017)

.MN
.MFN
Z4=1+2

.VARS5

Rule

.FIXS10

expression,

1003=Z2*X10
R5:Y2=1+3+5

expression.

Where
the

single

variable

ANDed

placed

with an

before

the

Example:

1006= (31 +4*52) * 27

OPTIMUM FORM FOR BOOL-143 EQUATIONS

should be rewritten:

Although equations can be written in many forms, the
optimum form for BOOL-143 equations is achieved by

1006 = 27* (31 +4*52)

observing the following rules. Rules

and 2 affect the

number of memory locations used to solve the equation.
Rules 3-6 affect the amount of time required to execute
the program. Rules 7 and 8 must be followed

Rule 4 - Variables and expressions should be grouped in
order of complexity, with single variables at the beginning

Boolean

equations are to be VT14 compatible. These rules are not
flagged by responding positively to the "VT14 YN?" query.

of equations and the large and more complex expressions at

the end.

4-15

123456789

Example:

W
12

^l-^h^h^h^h^h^l-!l-^h

_t__2--3-_4--5--6--7--tO--n-

1031 = [ (5 * 7 + 3) * 21 + (1052 * 1012) +
10

(13* 1017*/ 1005)] '22

20
should be rewritten:

1001

1031 = 22*[ (1052*1012) + (13*1017 */1 005)

+21'

(3+5*7) ]

40
50

60
70
^a,,,^
— vvhen exptessiurii ui aiJ^duAimaicij
or
operator
OR
complexity are combined using either the

Rule 5

the

>.i-^

conditions which

for Display)

more often true should precede the

other expression.
Solution:

1376= 1*2*3*4*5*6*7*10*11
1001 = 1376* (12+13) '(14+15)

Example:

1005=

VT14 Screen (Circuit Diagram Too Wide

Figure 4-2

AND operator, the expression representing the set of

(12*4 + /27)+

(21 * [3 + /51]

true 30% of

true 20% of time

(1007 */23)
true 50% of

time

Rule 8 - Boolean equations with circuit diagrams too high
two
for display on the VT14 screen must be divided into
equations; again the first equation drives a storage output
and the second equation senses the storage output and
drives the original output.

should be rewritten:

1005=(1007*/23) + (/27+12*4) + (21 * [3+/511)

Example:
1002 = 20* (21+22+234-24+25+26+27+30+31)

Rule 6 - Subroutines should be grouped near the end of
equations or expressions. Subroutines take longer to test

20-

1002

21-

00 Hl-

than a single variable.
10

Example:

1011=(Z3*/21) + ( [Z7 + 4] *3*5) + 1 '2

--^--

should be rewritten:

1011 = 1 *2+(/21 *Z3) + (3*5* [4+Z7]

)

60
70
-31-

Rule 7 - Boolean equations whose circuit diagrams are too
wide when displayed on the VT14 screen must be divided
into

two equations. The

first

Figure 4-3

equation drives a storage

VT14 Screen (Circuit Diagram Too High
for Display)

output and the second equation senses the storage output
and drives the original output.
Solution:

Example:
1001 = 1*2*3*4*5*6*7*10*11*(12+13) * (14+15)

4-16

1375 = 21+22+23+24+25+26+27+30
1002 = 20* (1375 + 31)

the

foregoing rules sometimes appear contradictory,

remember

that they are presented only as guidelines to

equations in the form which permits the
14 to determine as quickly as possible whether an

SAMPLE BOOL-143 PROGRAM
A BOOL-143 program representing a simple control circuit

assist in writing

follows.

Industrial

output is to be set ON or OFF. The rules attempt to limit
the

amount

of testing the

Industrial

14 must perform

before it can make the ON/OFF decision.

Comments are used to indicate the physical input

output which

represented.

The control statements

.LOG, .FIXS, .VARS, and .END are illustrated. Z-functions

and R-functions are included with the regular output and
internal

equations.

The output

follows the program.

listing from BOOL-143
BOOL-143 output is generated in

8-1/2 X 11 page format. Each page has a heading and a
dashed line to indicate where the pages should be cut apart.

4-17

BOOL-143/8 Output Listing

iP0UL14/8 SAMPLE PROURAM
TU IDENTIFY THE PRUbRAM WOULD APPEAR HERE.
i COMMENTS
CONTROL STATEMENTS WHICH AFFECT THE WHOLE PROGRAM FOLLOW.
.PRTN 1600
.LOCS50
.FIXS5
PRCEED THE MAIN PRObRAM.
; SUBROUTINES
; 2CR=/6PB*/7PB*/1PS*/1 FS*/5CR
J

ZP = / 13*/ 14*/ 6*/ 7* /I 01

;S0LE=3CR=(8PP*CRH+CRA>*7CR*8CR*9CR*/3LS*/4LS*/5LS
Rl 1004=( 15*100 7+1006)*101S*10 13*/10 14*/a*/3*/4
;S0LF=4CR=/7CR*<CRA*5CR+/9CP+9PP*CRH)
Pg:l00 5=/1018*( 100 6*101 1+1014+16*1007)
EQUATIONS FOLLOW.
J NORMAL
;2LT=CRA=RESET*/CRH*(AUTU+CRA)
1006=10*100 7*C1 1+1006)
;CALL TU REPETITIVE EQUATIONS.
;

.UARS0
Rl

JNORMAL EQUATIONS CONTINUE BELOW.
;3LT=CRH=RESET*(MAN+CRH)
1007=10*(18+1007)
;SOLA=SOLC=CRl=/6CR*(6PR*7PB*gCR*/lLS*/2LS*5LS*6LS*7CR+lCR)
1000=/ 100 3* ( 13*14*22* /0*/l*4* 5* 1012+1 000)
1002=0
;4LT=/6PB*/7PB*( IPS+IFS)
1010=/l3*14*<6+7)
; 5LT=5CR=3LS*/4LS+5CR*8CR
101 l=2*/3+101 1*1013
;SOLB=SOLD=6CR=7CR*(CRA*/5LS*/6LS*(6CR+5CR*8CP)+PB10*CRH)
100 2=1012*<1006*/4*/5*(100 2+1011*10l3)+17*100 7)
;6LT=7CR=4LS
1012=3
;7LT=8CR=1LS*2LS
1013=0*1
;8LT=9CR = /nPB*C9CR+12PB)*(7CR+8CR)
1014=/20*C1014+21)*( 1012+1013)
.SEC 60
;TMP1 =1FS*2LT*4LT*/6LS*(8LS+3LS+4LS)
1600=7* 1006* 10 10*/5*( 1+2+3)

;SULU=TMR0T1
1016=1601
.SR 1401*1403
>SHFT1=(SOLA+SOLR+SOLF)*1FS
1400=(1000+1002+1014)*7
;CALL TO REPETITIVE EQUATIONS.
.VAFS0
Fl
P2

.END

4-18

b n (J - L h ? L
b 1 1\ - L H L
,-g

V 1

.••

4-.\iY?,\

UMV*

Pu>N(Ch

J,^

BOCL-143/e

Page 0001

»bcoli4/p sample program
ICOMKENiTS TO

iDEf^TlFY THE PROGRAM WOULD APPEAR HtRt.
ICCNTRCL STATEMENTS WhICH AFFECT THE WHOLE PROGRAM FOLLOW
.PRTN 1600
.'LOCSSe

VFIXSS
ISUBROLTINES PRcEED ThE MAIN PROGRAM,
J2CRs/6PB«/7PB»/lPS«/iFS»/5CR
H2s/l3«/14«/6«/7#/i0ii
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2260
2261
2262

6313
6014
6306
6007
7311
2662
4377
6377

TF
TN

0i)54

jmH

TN
TN
JN
TN
TN

JF^

0013
^014
0006
0007
1011
0262
0377
0377

;SCLEs3CRs<QPb»cRH*CRa)«7CR#8CR#9CR»/3LS»/4lS»/5LS
Rl ie04»( 15*1007*1006) •i0i2#1013»/1014»/2«/3*/4

2270 4^15 TF
2271 5kJ07 TF
2272 2275 jpF
2273 5006 TF
2274 2736 JF^
2275 5312 TF
2276 5313 TF
2277 7014 TN
2320 6002 TN
2321 6303 TN
2322 6004 TN
2323 2706 jFN
2304 3004 SN
2325 0310 SKP
2326 1034 SF
2307 0354 jmH

0015
1007
0275
1006
0306
1012
1013
1014
0002
0003
0004
0306
1004
1004

4-19

•

|SCLFe4CR«/7CR»(CRA*5cR*/9CR*9PB»CRH)
R2liei?5"/lC112t(1006»1011*10i4 + 16»1007)

Z3i5
2316
e3i7
e32e
2321
Z322
8323
e324
e325
2326
2327

7312
2731
5306
5011
2327
5314
2327
4316
5007
2731
3005

1012
0331
1006
1011
0327
1014
0327
0016
1007
0331
1005

JFN
TF
TF

JFF
TF

JFf
TF
TF

JFN
SN

2330 0010 skp
2331 10125 SF
2332 0054 jmR

1005

INCRNAL EQUATIONS FQULOwi

l2LTsCRAsRESET*/CRH»(AUT0*CRA>
102 6a 1Z«1037» (11*1006)

BOCL-143/8

V*'

P*GE 0002

2250 0024 jmp
2251 0340 0340
4010
5007
2751
4311
2347
5026
2751
234.7 3026
2350 0310
2351 1006

2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346

TF
TF

JFN
TF
JFF
TF

JFN
SN
skp
SF

0010
1007
0351
0011
0347
1006
0351
1006
1006

ICALL TO REPETITIVE EQUATIONS,
'.VARS0

2357 2124 jmS
2360 2270 P<270

2361 2124 jmS
2362 iZ3l5 ?I315

4-20

INCRNAL EQUATIONS CONTINUE BELOW,

I3LT=CRH=RESET»(MAM*CRH)
2400
0421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2410

4010
2410
4012
2006
5007
2410
3007
0010
1007

Pi010

JFN
If

JFF
TF
JF^J

|?||gi0

0012
000g
1007
0010
1007

SKP

1007

ISCLA»S0LC=CR16/6CR«<6PB»7PB»2CR»/1LS»/2LS»5LS»6LS»7CH+1CR)
1020s /1 003* (13«l4»22«/0»/i»4»5»1012* 1000)
2416
24l7
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2430
2431
2432
2433

7303 TN
2440 JFN
4313 TF
4.114

2434
0124
2252
2J34
6300
6001

JFN
JMS
0292
JFF

4 004

4O0S
55312

2036

BOCL-143/8
2434
2433
2436
2437
2440

5000
2440
3000
0010
1000

TN
TN
TF
TF
TF
JFF

1003
0040
0013
0014
0034
0034
0000
0001
0004
0005
1012
0036

page 0003

1000
0040
1000

JFN
SN

skp
SF

1000

0000
0052
1002

102280
2446
2447
245i
2451
2452

4000
2452
3002
0310
1002

JFN
SN

SKP
SF

1002

4-21

j4LTs/6PR«/7PB»(lPS+lFS)
I»10s/l3»l4«(6*7)
2460
e461
Z462
2463
2464
2<»65

2466
2467
24718

2471

:113

014
471
306
067
337
471
310
010
310

TN
TF

JFN

C013
0014
0071

JFF
TF

JFN
SN
skp
SF

0067
0007
0071
1010
1010

j9LTa5CRs3LS«/4LS*5CR«8CR
1«11«2«/3*1011»1013
2477
2528
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527

4002 TF
632)3

2105
5011
5013
2507
3011
0010
1311

JFF
TF
TF

JFN
SN

0002
0003
0105
1011
1013
0107
1011

skp
SF

1011

lSGLessoLD=6CRs7CR»(CRA«/5US»/6LS*{6CR*5CR*8CR)*pB10«CHH)
1022=iel2»(1006»/4«/5«(l002*1011«1013)*17«1007)
2515 5312
e5i6 2535
2517 5306
2520 6004
2521 6005
2522 2530
2523 5302
2524 2133
2525 5311
2526 5013
2527 2133
2530 4317
2531 5007
2532 2535
2533 3302
2534 0010
2535 13Z2

JFN
TF
TN
TN

JFN
TF
JFf^

TF
TF

JFF
TF
TF

JFN
SN

1012
0135
1006
0004
0005
0130
1002
0133
1011
1013
0133
0017
1007
0135
1002

SkP
SF

1032

4-22

bool-143/8

page:

00f)4

»6LT«7CRs4uS
IB12=3
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547

40^3
2547
3312
0010
1012

jpN
SN
SKP
SF

0003
0147
1012
1012

)7LT=8cR=lLS»2LS
1013s0«l
2555
2556
2557
2568
2561
2562

4300
4001
2562
3013
0010
1013

0000
0001
0162
1013

SKP
SF

1013

TF
TF

JFN

;8LT»9CR»/11PB#(9CR*12PB)*(7CR*8CR)
Iil4=/20»(1014*21)»(1012*1013)
257»
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
262i
2621
2622
2623
2624
'.'SEC

6020
2604
5014
2176
4021
2604
5012
2202
5013
2604
3314
0010
1014

JFN
TF

JFF
TF

JFN
TF

JFF
TF

JFN
SN

0020
0204
1014
0176
0021
0204
1012
0202
1013
0204
1014

SkP
SF

1014

JlHRl «1FS«2LT#4UT»/6lS»(2I,S + 3LS + 41,S)
1*008 7« 100 6»1310*/5#{1 2*3)

2612 4007 TF
2613 5006 TF
2614 5010 TF
2615 6005 TN
2616 2627 JFN
2617 4001 TF
2620 2225 JFF
2621 4002 TF
2622 222!5 JFF
2623 4003 TF
2624 2627 JFN
2625 3600 SN
2626 0010 SKP
2627 1600 SF

0037
1006
1010
0005
0227
0001
0225
0002
0225
0003
0227
1600
1600

4-23

;SCLG=TMR0T1
5601 Jf
e636 2641 JFN
e637 3016 SN
26Ai 0310 SkP

16131

(?635

BOCL-143/8

Vt^

0241
1016

PaGF 1^005

2641 1016 Sf

1016

VSR 1401,1403

)SHFT1=(SOUA+SOLB*SOLF)«1FS
14208 (1000*1002*1014)«7
e647 530B TF
2650 22&5 JFF
e651 5022 TF
e652 2255 JFF
2653 5014 TF
2654 2661 JFN
£655 43£7 TF
2656 2661 JFN
2657 2263 JFF
2660 0010 SKP
2661 1400 SF
2662 2274 JFF
2663 7402 TN
2664 3400 SN
2665 2674 JFN
2666 0133 MOVBIT
2667 1402 1402
2670 1403 1403
2671 0133 MOVBIT
2672 1401 1401
2673 1402 1402
2674 0000 NOP

1000
0255
1002
0255
1014
0261
0007
0261
0263
1400
0274
1400
1400
0274

4-24

jcALL TO repetitive: equations,

VVARS0

27Z2 Z124 jmS
2703 e270 027?

e7e4 0124 jmS
I?7e5

0.315

fi315

0713

12004

clRPC

VE^D

ERROR LiNESt 0000
LAST LOCATION}

1C713

4-25

CHAPTER 5
SET-143

SYMBOLIC EQUATION TRANSLATOR
Industrial 14 programming, using BOOL-143, requires that
the control equations be written in terms of input numbers

= 777 (X0-X777 optional), output numbers

(Y0-Y377

Y1000-Y1377

1000-1377

and

optional)

Hardware Requirements

SET-143 translates an Industrial 14 program of any length

8K PDP-8 family computer. SET-143

using

internal

low-speed

function

numbers
1400-1777
(Y400-Y777
or
Y1400-Y1777 optional). Input numbers are obtained by

output.

assigning inputs (pushbuttons, limit switches, etc) to input

Symbols

converters and selecting the corresponding input numbers

Symbols in

from a chart. A similar procedure is followed for assigning

limited

output numbers. Internal Function* numbers are assigned

letter

according to function

(retentive

memory, shift register,

timer

counter).

The

user

then

terms

input

and

expressions

and

utilizes

Teletype or high-speed paper tape input and

No provision exists in SET-143 for keyboard input.

SET-143 equation must be unique and are

to 6 characters.

Each character must be either a
(A-Z) or a number (0-9); no other characters are

allowed within a symbol. A symbol can begin with either a

translates

control

number or

output

physical

others are possible.

Some sample symbols follow; many

a letter.

components and internal function types.
Because

some

because

the

optional

preprocessor

find

this

translation

translation
is

for

subject

BOOL-143

cumbersome,

human
is

and
an

15PB

This

SOLA

157TMR

preprocessor,
designated
as
SET-143 (for Symbolic
Equation Translator), accepts symbolic equations in terms

meaningful to

BOOL-143 and the

Industrial

BCKLS

FUNDEP
AUTOPB

error,

available.

LS12

SPINMT

NEXT
CHECK
RUNLT
ST10N

ST2MAN
MIXRUN
LIQFUL
15ST0P

The following are examples of illegal symbols:

14 System.

The translation is performed according to a user-supplied

MANUALPB

More than 6 characters

symbol table, which provides the I/O number equivalents of

STA#1

Illegal character within the symbol

the equation elements.

Symbol Definition
SET-143 uses symbol definitions to associate symbolic
names with the I/O number (X, Y optional), R, and Z

SET-143 is completely optional. The user may choose to
work directly with BOOL-143, performing any necessary
translations. SET-143 uses the computer to perform and
document the translation from meaningful user symbols to
the I/O numbers required by BOOL-143 and the Industrial
14. The SET-143 output listing is a useful system

values required by BOOL-143. The user can assign any legal

symbol to an I/O number in the range 0-1777 octal. The
following are typical assignments:

document, especially from a maintenance point of view.
The input tape to SET-143 is prepared with the PDP-8

LS12= 10
SPINMT =57

Editor program; this input tape can be saved for editing

FULDEP= 123
AUTOPB = 50

when future developments change the control equations.
The output tape from SET-143 can also be corrected with
the PDP-8 Editor.

NEXT =
RUNLT = 1200
MIXRUN = 1023
LIQFUL = 12

The symbol must be followed by an equal sign, and the
equal sign must be followed by an I/O

'Chapter

3 contains details concerning

Internal

Function

I/O

optional),

assignment.

number (X or Y
R or Z. Spaces are allowed within the statement

and have no affect on the processing.

5-1

The symbol table should be organized as shown in Figure

SET-143 does not permit the user to assign a symbol to an
I/O number value that contains an 8 or 9, or which is
greater than 1777. In addition, SET-143 does not permit
the same symbol to be defined for two different values {for

5-1

with

inputs,

outputs,

R-functions, and

Z-functions

separated. This separation simplifies checkout and limits

the possibility of duplicating assignments. The symbol table

example, AUTO = 1 and AUTO = 321). In these instances,

especially useful

when the inputs and outputs are listed

SET-143 generates error messages.

by numerically increasing input and output values. The
wiring of inputs and outputs to the Industrial 14 input and

A symbol can be defined as equal to either a BOOL-143 Ror Z-function. The value of the R- or Z-function can be any

output converters can then be checked against this list.
Comments, preceded by a semicolon, can also be used to

decimal number from 0-51 1

further identify the input or output assignments.

Symbol Table
The SET-143 symbol

The symbol table must be separated from the rest of the
program with number signs (#) both preceding and
following the symbol table. In particular, BOOL-143
statements (LOG, VARS, etc.) or symbolic
control
equations should not appear within the two number signs.

table contains definitions of user's

symbols in terms of I/O numbers 0-1777, X, Y, Z or R
numbers. These symbol definitions allow equations to be
written in a format other than the I/O number format
required by

BOOL-143. The program may contain several

symbol tables in which symbols are defined in terms of I/O
numbers, Z-values, or R-values. All SET-143 symbol tables

The symbol table permits the definition of 1088 input,

number sign (#) as the first
character of a line. The # sign must also appear at the end
of the symbol table. Other characters on the line containing
must be preceded

the

number

signs

are

ignored

and

may

used

output, internal function, Z- and R-functions combined. If

the

program

extremely

for

contains

unlikely

more than

eventuality)

the

1088 symbols (an
program must be

by SET-143 in two sections. Each part of the
program must contain the definition for each symbol used

comments.

translated

A sample symbol table is in Figure 5-1

in that section.

#START Uh SYMBOL TABLE
TABLE OF OUTPUT VALUES
*
SPINDLE MOTOR 1
; START
1000
SS1 =
;START SPINDLE MOTOR 2
1001
SS2 =
;LE1'T CLAMP
100S
Lt;L =
;lei'T unclamped
1003
LUi.MCL =
clamp
=
i RIGHT
1004
PCL
UNCLAMPED
J RIGHT
1005
PUlMCL =
TABLE 01- INPU VALUES
;
;auto/man reset pushbutton
FbSLT=
mode pushbutton
; automatic
1
AUTtJPB =
; MANUAL MODE PUSHEUllON
2
MANPB=
;clamped part left limit switch
3
CLPTL=
jclamped
part right limit switch
4
CLPTR=
;head forward limit swiich
b
HDi-WD=
;head returned limit switch
6
HLRfcl=
CTIONS
TABLE Oh
FU\
3
;CLAMPS IN PLACE INDICATION
?,1
CLMPL\< =
;ALL HEADS RETRACTED INDICATION
7.8
HLFT =
TABLE Ui- R l-UiX CT10>\)S
*
;emergency return shutdown chech
fciV;HEl =
Rl
;FULL DEPTH ACHIEVED
R2
fULLtP=
iHlHU Lh S YMi'UL TABLE
t

Figure 5-1

Input Symbol Table to SET-143

5-2

SET-143 copies the symbol table onto the output tape and
causes the symbol assignments to become a permanent part

All internal equation characters such as =, *, +,
I,

BOOL-143 listing. SET-143 precedes each line that

of the

contains a symbol assignment with a line containing ;$.
These two characters inform BOOL-143 that the following
line

comment. (The

;

(,),

and ] are not changed whenever they

are found in the symbolic equation.

Any symbols that are part of the symbolic
equation and are not found in the symbol table

specifies "start of comment"; the

$ specifies "continued on next line").

are not changed

when they are inserted in the

I/O numbers equation. This permits the user to

Symbolic Equations

intermix an I/O number, R- or Z-value with an

Once the symbol table has been supplied to SET-143, the

equation to be translated.

user can provide symbolic equations to be tranlated. Three
examples of symbolic equations follow:

Handling of BOOL-143 R and Z Functions

AUTOLT
STMTR1
SLD1FD
VLV10P

AUTOPB AUTOLT*/RESTPB
=
SLD1RT * TRNSDN
STNTR1

R- and Z-functions can be included

-I-

-i-

translated

symbol can be assigned to the R- or Z-function in the same

(MIXDN*

/0PLS1

VLV10P)

in the program to be
by SET-143. The values of the functions must be

MIXRUN

0-511 decimal (R0-R511, Z0-Z511).

the range

manner as an I/O number value, or the R- or Z-value can be
used alone. For example, suppose that

The symbols used in the equations should be selected in a
manner meaningful to the control system designer and

who

use and

maintain the

equations

become

part

understood by those

easily

system.

The

symbolic

BOOL-143

source

assignments.

That

program
is,

just

the

MTRI is to be an

R-function. One approach is as follows:

the

MTRI

= 1012

symbolic

AUTO

= 31

CLAMP
FULDEP

= 107

RMTRI

R5; REPEAT MOTOR 1

SET-143 precedes each symbolic

equation by a ;$, thereby specifying that the equation is a

comment.

= 1057

#
A

symbolic

equation can contain

maximum

250

MRTI = AUTO * CLAMP

RMTRI:

FULDEP

characters; therefore, a lengthy equation can be written on

up to 3-1/2 lines. Any intermediate line is ended by a $,
and the last line ends with the normal carriage return. If an
equation

exceeds

250

characters,

SET-143 types the

;STARTOF MAIN PROGRAM
RMTRI; CALL TO MRTI SUBROUTINE

following message:

;??LINE TRUNCATED
and translates only those symbols contained in the first 250

the R-function need not be assigned a
symbolic value and the arbitrary R -number can be used. If

characters. This message is typed before the offending line.

this approach

Alternatively,

SET-143 processes each symbolic equation according to the
following procedure:

Output the complete symbolic equation
comment.

chosen, the RMTRI =

from the symbol table, and R5
program in place of RMTRI.

R5 entry is deleted

used throughout the

The same procedure is used for Z-functions. A Z-function is

as a

a group

Industrial

14 variables

(inputs,

outputs, or

internal functions) that are tested and the result recorded
2.

Read each symbol of the equation.

by setting the TEST flag, rather than setting an output. A
symbolic value can be assigned to the Z-function, such as

Search the symbol table for the I/O number (X

AHDRET

or Y optional) R- or Z-value of each symbol.

closed).

Output the translated value for each symbol in

could also be identified with the arbitrary Z-number, which

a BOOL-143 equation format.

does not require translation by SET-143.

(all

heads returned) or

AVALCL (all values

The Z-function subroutine could test a group of

limit switches or, perhaps, pressure sensors. The Z-function
4.

5-3

Comments
Normal BOOL-143 comments can be inserted in the source
program to SET-143 by simply preceding each comment
with a semicolon. SET-143 outputs any existing comments

Table 5-1

SET-143 Error Messages
Cause

Error Number

unchanged.
01

First character of a user symbol is not

an alphanumeric character.

NOTE
Everything on the SET-143 source tape, except

Examples:

BC)OL-143 control statements, becomes a
comment on the output tape from SET-143.
All symbol assignments and symbolic equations

/LSI 2=1

=23

become comments to BOOL-143.
02

The user symbol contains more than 6
alphanumeric characters.

BOOL-143 Control Statements
Examples:

SET-143 processes BOOL-143 control statements by simply

STA1MTR = 1053

transferring them, unaltered, onto the BOOL-143 source
tape. SET-143 recognizes a control statement by the period

that precedes each statement {VARS5, .LOC50, etc.).

equal sign.

.ENDN, and .EOT statements affect the
operation of SET-143 in addition to being output on the
BOOL-143 source tape. The .END and .ENDN statements
halt SET-143 and the translation process. The .EOT

The

.END

HDRET-27
CONVOK; 1053

statement acts as a normal end-of-tape statement to allow a
new tape to be loaded. The translation process continues
after an .EOT when the PDP-8

The user symbol is not followed by an

CONT switch is pressed.

The equal sign is followed by an illegal
character (not an X, Y, R, Z or I/O
number).

Examples:

Error Messages

SET-143

errors

are

detected

only

The

error

message

during

on the

line

immediately after the offending definition. Table 5-1

lists

definitions.

typed

MIXRUN = ;1057

symbol

12TIMR = P27
05

the errors that can be detected.

non-octal

contained
is

detected, the definition that caused

ignored

SET-143 continues with the

Whenever an error
the

error

and

I/O

number.

non-octal digit (8 or 9) follows an X,

Y; or a non-numeric character follows

anX,Y, Zor R.

processing. The error messages are typed as comments on
the output listing and/or tape in the following format:

06
;

number

??Enn

An illegal value is assigned to an I/O
number X, Y, Z or R (I/O number X
or Y greater than 1777, R or Z greater

than 511).

where nn is one of the error codes listed in Table 5-1

The following message
1088 symbols:

typed

Examples:

the program exceeds

TMR23=2407
RSOLB = R2000

SYMBOL TABLE OVERFLOW
07

An illegal character other than

;

or ) or

space follows the variable number.

SET-143 halts in the unlikely instance that this condition
with the
arises. The program should then be segmented
translation
its
permit
BOOL-143 control statement .EOT to
by SET-143 in two parts. The symbols required for each

Examples:

0PVLV3 = 1050 OPEN VALVE
BACKLS = 27:BACK LIMIT SWITCH

"rogram part must be defined in that section.

5-4

Sorted Symbol Table

Table 5-1 (Cont)

An additional

SET-143 Error Messages

SET-143
Error Number

of the symbol table

typed after

.END statement). This symbol table is an alphabetic sort of

Cause

defined symbols and associated

all

I/O number, R- and

Z-values.

A user symbol Is defined equal to two

listing

has completed the translation process (after an

different values.

This optional symbol

Examples:

list

only generated on the output

device (Teletype or high-speed punch). The symbol

MTR53= 1005

list is

not in the form of BOOL-143 comments and is not read by

BOOL-143 because

the

symbol

list

follows

.END

statement. However, the symbol list is a permanent part of

the output tape and can be listed off-line at any time.

MTR53 = R20

A previously defined I/O number (X,

Y),

R-number has been used

the original symbol table is written in increasing I/O, R-

or Z-numbers, two approaches are provided for identifying

again.

a symbol. To determine which output is 1057, for example,

Examples:
RUNLT = 1036

output light is associated with motor starter STMTR 1 refer

refer

to the original symbol table.

To determine which
,

to the alphabetically-organized

symbol table supplied by

SET-143.

SOLB=1036

Any defined symbols not referenced
followed by a question mark
list.

an equation are

the alphabetized symbol

For example, the statement

Error Listing

At the end of every SET-143 symbol table (after the second

STOPPB 27?

#) SET-143 types the following message:
signifies that the

;**SYMBOL ERRORS: n

symbol STOPPB was defined, but was

never used in a symbolic equation.

where n is the number of errors in the preceding table of
symbolic definitions. The number n

the decimal error

Sample SET-143 Program

total and is greater than or equal to zero.

Figures 5-2 through 5-5
translation

SET-143. Figure 5-3 is the Translated Symbol Table

When the high-speed punch is used as the output device, the

into

symbol error message allows the translation to be stopped

(optional).

pressing

detected

the PDP-8
the

STOP switch

program.

Thus,

the

can

Figure 5-4

the translated control equations

program which will be read into BOOL-143. Figure 5-5 is

any errors are

program

show a sample program and its

by SET-143. Figure 5-2 is the program as read

the

corrected before the equations are translated.

optional

alphabetically.

5-5

symbol

table

listing

which

arranged

STAPT UF SYMBOL TABLE
TABLF U F INPUTS
;t«'jASTEP STOP PUSHBUTTON
MSTSTP=
;MASTER START PUSHBUTTON
KSTRST=
1KC0NT= 2
iCUNTACT UN MOTOR
ON MOTOR 2
2MCUNT= 3
; CONTACT
;SPINDLE STOP PUSHBUTTON
SPNSTP= H
START PUSHBUTTON
SPNST= 5
; SPINDLE
;LEVEP ENOAUED fop spindle DIRECTION
LEVF.N(i = 6
ENUAbED PRESSURE SWITCH
CLUENU= 7
; CLUTCH
SPINDLE SPEED
; DECREASE
DECSPD= 10
; INCREASE
SPINDLE SPEED
I>JCSPD= 11
LUBPRS= 12
;PRESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATED BY ADEQUATE LUBE PRESSURE
LUBLEV= 13
;LEVEL switch activated by ADEQUATE LURE SUPPLY
#
;

OUTPUTS
; TABLE OF
;SULENUID
TO ENUAOE SPINDLE CLUTCH
SPNCLU= 1000
2 TO ENUAUE FEED CLUTCH
i SOLENOID
FFEDCL= 1001
3 TO INCREASE SPINDLE SPEED
SPDINC= 1002
; SOLENOID
H TO DECREASE SPINDLE SPEED
SPDDEC= 1003
; SOLENOID
;S0LEN0ID 5 TO PROVIDE SPINDLE LUBRICATION
LUBSOL= 1004
iLUBF FAILURE LIbHT
LBFAIL= 1005
J FEED
CLUTCH TIME DELAY
TFDCLU= 1020
JLUBRICATION INTERVAL TIME DELAY
TLUBIN= 1021
;LUBRICATI0N FAILTBE SNDICATION DELAY
TLUBFL= 1022
# END OF SYMBOL TABLE
1

CONTROL EQUATIONS FOLLOW.
.LOC200
.FIXS5

;

SPNCLU=/MSTSTP*(MSTRST+1MC0NT*2MC0NT)*/SPNSTP*LEVENG*[SPNST+SPNCLU3
TFDCLU=CLUEN(i
.MEN

FEEDCL=TFDCLU
SPDINC=SPNCLU*INCSPD*/DECSPD
SPDDEC=SPNCLU*DECSPD*/INCSPD
LUBS0L=TLUBIN
.MN

LBFAIL=TLUBFL
TLUBIN=LUBPRS
TLUBFL=LUBLEV*TLUBI N
.END800
Figure 5-2

SET-143 Input Program

5-6

;s
# START OF SYMBOL TABLE
STABLE OF INPUTS

MSTSTP=

JMASTER STOP PUSHBUTTON

MSTRST=

;MASTER START PUSHBUTTON

1MC0NT=

;

CONTACT UN MOTOR

2MC0NT=

;

CONTACT ON MOTOR 2

;

SPINDLE STOP PUSHBUTTON

SPINDLE START PUSHBUTTON

;LEVER ENGAGED FOP SPINDLE DIRECTION

;

;s
1

SPNSTP=
;s

SPNST=
i$

LEVENG=
;s

CLUENG=
JS

DECSPD= 10

CLUTCH ENGAGED PRESSURE SWITCH

^DECREASE SPINDLE SPEED

INCSPD=

LUBPRS=

^PRESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATED BY ADEQUATE LUBE PRESSURE

;

LUBLEV=
J

INCREASE SPINDLE SPEED

LEVEL SWITCH ACTIVATED BY ADEQUATE LUBE SUPPLY

TABLE OF OUTPUTS

SPNCLU= 1000

;

SOLENOID

TO ENGAGE SPINDLE CLUTCH

FEEDCL= 1001

SOLENOID

TO ENGAGE FEED CLUTCH

SPDINC= 1002

;

SOLENOID

;

SOLENOID

TO DECREASE SPINDLE SPEED

iSOLENOID

TO PROVIDE SPINDLE LUBRICATION

SPDDEC= 1003
;s

LUBSOL= 0004
;$

LBFAIL= 1005

INCREASE SPINDLE SPEED

;LUBE FAILURE LIGHT

TFDCLU= 1020

>FEED CLUTCH TIME DELAY

TLUBIN= 1021
;$

TLUBFL= 1022
i$
#

LUBRICATION INTERVAL TIME DELAY

^LUBRICATION FAILURE INDICATION DELAY

END OF SYMBOL TABLE
Figure 5-3

SET-143 Translated Symbol Table (Optional)

5-7

CONTROL EQUATIONS FOLLOW.
.LOC200
.FIXS5

;

SPNCLU=/KSTSTP*(MSTRST+1MCONT*8MCONT>*/SPNSTP*LEVENU*[SPNST+SPNCLU3
1000=/0*C l+2*3)*/A*6*C5+1000 3
s

;

TFDCLU=CLUENG
1020=7
MFN

•

FEEDCL=TFDCLU
1001=1020
*

•

SPpiNC=SPNCLU*lNCSPD*/DECSPD
1002=1000*1 1*/10
s

;

SPDDEC=SPNCLU*DECSPD*/INCSPD
1003=1000*10*/!
1

LUBSOL=TLUBIN
1004=1021
.MN
;$

LBFAIL=TLUBFL
1005=1022
i

TLUBIN=LUBPRS
1021=12
iS

TLUBFL=LUBLEV*TLUB1N
1022=13*1021
.END 800
Figure 5-4

SET-143 Translated Program

5-8

IMCUNT

2MCUiNIT

CLUENG
DECSPD
FEEDCL
INCSPD
LDFAIL
LEVENU
LUBLEV
LUBPRS
LUBSOL
MSTRST
MSTSTP
SPDDEC
SPDINC
SPNCLU
SPNST
SPNSTP
TEDCLU
TLUBFL
TLUBIN

1001
1

1005
6

13
12

1004
1

Z0
1003
1002
1000
5
A

1020
1022
1021

Figure 5-5 Sorted Symbol Table (Optional)

5-9

CHAPTER 6
PAL-143

SYMBOLIC PROGRAM ASSEMBLER
The PAL-143 Symbolic Program Assembler

ASSIGN INPUTS
a OUTPUTS TO

translates

programs into binary machine code for the Industrial 14.

INPUT/OUTPUT
TERMINALS

14 programs can be written with the Editor and

Industrial

"assembled" (translated into machine code) by PAL-143,
enabling the user to correct program errors with the Editor

and

reassemble

capability

the

program

the

debugging

simplifies

with

PAL-143.

procedure

TYPE THE

INSTRUCTIONS

This

IN PROGRAM
FORM WITH

because

sections of the source program can be moved, or new lines

EDITOR

READ SOURCE
TAPE BACK
INTO EDITOR

can

be inserted, without retyping the remainder of the
program. Figure 6-1 shows the procedure for developing

GENERATE THE
SOURCE TAPE

programs using PAL-143.

FOR PAL-143

CORRECT
THE PROGRAM
ERRORS

PAL-143 GENERAL FEATURES
Chapter

machine

code

this

manual describes the
Test

instructions.

Industrial

instructions

refer

ASSEMBLE THE

INDUSTRIAL 14
PROGRAM WITH
PAL-143

specific input, output, and internal function numbers; jump

instructions

reference

(specifically,

relative or

locations by an address number
an absolute address for a JMP or JMS and a

page address for

JFF or JFN). Consider the
YES

following Industrial 14 program segment:

227

TN 15

230

JFN 233

LOAD THE
ASSEMBLED PROGRAM PAPER
TAPE INTO THE
INDUSTRIAL 14
USING ODP-143
OR THE VT14

SN1012
232 SKP
233 SF1012
234 JMP
231

235

PROGRAMMING
TERMINAL

437
YES

NOTES:
1.

Each instruction

assigned to a numbered location.

GENERATE

The JFN and JMP instructions refer to locations by

PAPER TAPE FOR
DOCUMENTATION

specific address numbers.

The TN, SN, and SF instructions refer to inputs or

Figure 6-1

outputs by specific number.

Procedure for Developing Programs
Using PAL-143

6-1

Changing

LOG 227
TN 15
TN 1027

14 programs written with numeric

Industrial

cumbersome. For instance, in
the preceding program example, assume that a TN 1027

addresses and references

instruction

stored

required

location

following the

227.

correct

15 instruction

the

program with

JFN 234
SN 1012
SKP

ODP-143, each instruction is moved to the next sequential
location by typing it into that location, thereby enabling
TN 1027 to be inserted at location 230. However, moving

SF 1012

JMP
437

each instruction to the next successive location does not
solve the problem.

PAL-143 recognizes LOG 227 as an origin statement and
the

assigns

The result of moving the instructions is as follows:

instructions

locations, beginning with

stored in
in

which

sequential

location 227. Hence,

TN 15 is

227; TN 1027 is stored in 230; JFN 234 is stored

231;

etc.

The need

write

location

numbers

eliminated by using PAL-143.

TN 15
TN 1027

227

230

Symbolic Addresses

The LOG statement alone does not eliminate problems that
arise when Industrial 14 programs are altered. However,

JFN 233
SN 1012
SKP

231

232
233

234
235
236

automatic location assignment using the

LOG statement

SF 1012

permits symbolic addresses which do eliminate some of the
problems. Symbolic addresses are name tags or labels used

JMP

437

instructions with numeric addresses, jump instructions are

identify

memory

locations.

Instead

of writing

jump

written with symbols for addresses. These symbols are then
identified (defined) elsewhere in the program. The symbol
is assigned

a numeric value by PAL-143 during the assembly

of the program.

Inspection shows that by relocating the program segment,

the

sense

the

JFN 233

instruction

has

changed.

the jump caused a transfer to the SF

Originally

now it causes transfer to the SKP instruction.
must be changed to a JFN 234 to

instruction;

The JFN

The instruction JFN 234, for example, can be written as
JFN TAG. The location to be jumped to is assigned the
address label TAG, followed by a comma, and precedes the

1012

instruction

reference instruction. Consider the following:

preserve the original sense of the program. Dangers are

involved

simply

These dangers can

relocating

programs with ODP-143.

be avoided by using PAL-143 and

reassembling, as described in the paragraphs that follow.

JFN TAG
Location Assignment

14 programs are stored

Industrial

consecutive memory

TAG.SF 1012

locations; therefore, the need to specify the address of each

instruction

PAL-143

unnecessary. The locations can be assigned by

using an origin statement for the sequence of

instructions. The statement

LOG NNNN where NNNN is

an absolute Industrial 14 address. This statement instructs

PAL-143

assign

the

instructions

which

The JFN

instruction references the symbolic address

TAG

consecutive Industrial 14 locations, beginning with location

while the statement TAG, SF 1012 defines the symbolic

NNNN. For example:

address.

6-2

PAL-143 assigns an address value to each instruction of the
program

using

Location

Rule 5 - A symbol must be defined at only one point

LOC
statement sets the LC to a specific value; for instance, LOC
200

the

sets

successive

200.

instruction

Counter

(LC).

PAL-143 then
the

locations specified by the LC.

source

The

assigns

program

each

locations of
is

are meaningful to

The LC is incremented for

by a comma) it is assigned the value of the LC. If the LC is
equal to 234 when the line TAG, SF 1012 is encountered in
the source program, the SF 1012 is stored in Industrial 14

memory

instruction

symbol.

ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS
PAL-143 assignment

statements

equate

six-character

TAG is assigned the value of

symbol with a numeric value. Symbols used in assignment

JFN TAG becomes JFN 234 when

statements are subject to the rules just given. Assigning a
value to a symbol, which is also used as a symbolic address,

location 234, and

The

234.

PAL-143 although more characters

Rule 5 - No spaces or tabs are allowed within the

followed

many

may be used.

14 memory. Whenever a symbolic

Industrial

encountered, (recognized because

program. Symbols can be referenced as

Rule 4 - Only the first six characters of the symbol

the

each instruction, thereby storing the program in sequential
address

times as necessary.

assembled by PAL-143.

illegal in PAL-143; however, the same symbol can be used

more than one assignment statement. The last assigned
value is used whenever a symbol has been redefined in this
in

NOTE
Programs in this form can be readily changed to

manner.

eliminate bugs. The program can be completely
relocated by changing the LOC statement. Parts

of the program

may be

inserted

The most common use of assignment statements in
PAL-143 programs is to identify input and output

or deleted

without affecting address references made by
jump instructions. Upon reassembly, PAL-143

assignments.

switch

correctly assigns all symbolic addresses and any

Industrial

references to them.

easier to

1" rather than

remember

"17

limit

that

"LSI

switch

1".

limit

Since

14 programs must refer to inputs and outputs by

the numbers which are determined by the I/O terminal
assignments (17 for instance), the following PAL-143

Symbolic addressing does not eliminate the need to
consider paging for JFF and JFN instructions. An address

assignment statement is used:

error results if a PAL-143 program contains instructions
which reference symbolic addresses that are not defined

LSI = 17

within the same Industrial 14 memory page. Only the JMP
or JMS instruction can directly cross page boundaries.

Instructions can then test "LSI" in place of testing "17".

The

Industrial

14 program

may

include,

usually at

its

The selection of the symbol TAG is arbitrary and could be

beginning, a list of such assignments to be used throughout

any group of letters and numbers subject to the rules for

the program. This allows the program to be written
completely symbolic form. For example:

symbols which follow. For example, SETY10N

a valid

PAL-143 symbol because it contains 7 characters; however,

LSI = 17

only the first six are recognized by PAL-143. Thus, if the

symbols

SETY10N

and

SETY10FF

are

both

used

LS2 = 30

symbolic addresses

first

and cannot distinguish between two

SOLA= 1011
SOLB= 1012

PAL-143 program, a multiple
definition error would occur. PAL-143 recognizes only the
six

identical

characters,

symbols

these first six characters.

PB1 = 10

PB2= 11

The error

because the same symbol is defined twice in the
program. Note that the symbols SOLAON and SOLAOFF
results

LOC 250
Y11,

are perfectly acceptable because they differ in the first six

characters.

Rule

TN LSI
TFLS2
JFF SOLAN
TF PB1

- The first character of a symbol must be a

letter.

SOLAN,

Rule 2 — The successive characters in the symbol can

TN SOLB
JFN SOLAF
SN SOLA
SKP

be letters or numbers only; no special characters such

SOLAF,

as *,+,-, /, and $ are permitted within symbols.

END
6-3

SF SOLA

in a

The

/PB1 IS SHUT DOWN BUTTON

TN PB1

END statement is necessary to mark the end of the

program for PAL-143. Assignment statements need only be
made at one point in the program and the symbols thus
assigned can then be used throughout the program. (This

example controls only one output.) Note that LSI = 17 is
used in place of input 17.
Multiple Location Instructions

PAL-143 PROGRAM CONVENTIONS
PAL-143 programs are free-form; spaces and tabs can be
At
used to organize and format the program as desired.
least

one space

(or

tab)

must be used between an

or
instruction such as TN or SF and the reference symbol
spaces
and
Tabs
instance).
for
operand (SL1 or SOLE

Industrial

14 two-location instructions (JMP, JMS, TRM)

are written in the PAL-143 source program with both parts
of the instruction on one line. These instructions require

two

14 memory locations when translated into

Industrial

machine code instructions. Other two-location instructions
and some three- location

cannot be used within a symbol or instruction; they can
only be used between symbolic addresses, instructions,

Chapter

operands, and comments. Otherwise, these characters have

PAL-143 appears

no affect on the machine code generated by PAL-143 and

machine code

The

introduced

instructions are

example

following

illustrates

the

two-location translation process by PAL-143. The input to

the

the translated output

left;

at the right.

The symbols 0UTPT5 and

NEXT are symbolic addresses which have been assigned the

are only used to format the source program. For example:

values 1323 and 1401, respectively, by the current location

SOLA,

counter of PAL-143.

LSI

STAIN = 2002

generates the same machine code as

LOC 200

SOLA,TF LSI
where the comma is needed to identify SOLA as a symbolic

TRM STAIN

200 TRM
201 2002

JMS 0UTPT5

202 JMS
203 1323

JMP NEXT

204 JMP

address.

205 1401

Comments
Program comments are lines of text included in the
PAL-143 program to clarify the function of an instruction
or a group of instructions. Comments do not affect the

0UTPT5,TN LSI

machine code generated by PAL-143; these are only
reminders for later reference to the program listing.
Comments can be added within the PAL-143 program by
preceding them with a slash

{/).

NEXT.TNSOLB

Comments can either

conclude lines of a program, or they can be on separate
assignment
lines by themselves. PAL-143 instructions, or
statements, must not be included on a line started with a
comment because all information would then be treated as

Permanent Symbol Table
PAL-143 must "know" what Industrial 14 machine code to
generate for each symbol of a source program before it can

part of the comment.

The following are examples of PAL-143 comments:

complete

acceptable to ODP-143.

TF LSI

that

program

Industrial

(Numbers are the only elements of PAL-143 source
programs that require no definition; all symbols must be
defined in terms of these numbers.) Definitions can be in
the form of assignment statements (for instance, LSI =27)

LOC 200
Y1,

into

machine code program which

translate

/THE FOLLOWING PROGRAM CONTROLS
/SOLENOID A

and symbolic addresses (values of which are defined by the
location counter and LOC statements).

/LSI ACTIVATED WHEN SLIDE 2
/IS FULL FORWARD

6-4

In addition to user-defined symbols, PAL-143 has
a table of
permanently-defined symbols and numeric equivalents. The

permanent

symbol

table

enables

the

user

write

statements such as TN 15 without previously defining the
symbol TN. This symbol and all others given in Table 6-1

are permanently defined within

PAL-143. The list includes

the basic Industrial 14 instructions, introduced
2,

well

the

in Chapter
extended instructions introduced in

Chapter 9.

Table 6-1

PAL-143 Permanent Symbol Table Industrial 14 Instructions
Range
of

Symbolic

Octal

4000

6000

0000

Meaning

Argument

Test input, output or internal

Input, output or internal

function for OFF

function number

Argument

0-1777

Test input, output or internal

Input, output or internal

function for ON

function number

Set output or internal function

Output or internal function

1000-1777

Output or internal function

1000-1777

0-1777

OFF
SN

2000

Set output or internal function

ON
JFF

2000

Jump if test flag is OFF

Page address

0-377

JFN

2400

Jump if test flag is ON

Page address

0-377

JMP

0024

Jump unconditional

Absolute address

0-7777

JMS

0124

Jump to subroutine

Absolute address

0-7777

SKP

0010

Skip next location

None

—

JMR

0054

Jump return from subroutine

None

—

NOP

0000

No operation

None

—

CLR

0170

Clear all external outputs

None

—

LEM

0040

Leave external mode

None

—

EEM

0060

Enter external mode

None

—

CLRPC

0004

Clear 13-bit PC

None

—

RDPC

0046

Read Industrial 14 Program

None

—

Counter

EOL

0130

Enable output loop

6-5

Table 6-1 (Cont)

PAL-143 Permanent Symbol Table Industrial 14 Instructions
Range
of

Argument

Symbolic

Octal

Meaning

DOL

0140

Disable output loop

None

EOM

0150

Enable output multiplexer

None

DOM

0160

Disable output multiplexer

None

0020

Change to instruction field

None

CIFO

0030

Change to instruction field 1

None

CIF1

0600

Change to data field

None

CDFO

0700

Change to data field 1

None

CDF1

CLRWD

0003

Clear I/O word

I/O word

0-1777

SETWD

0013

Set I/O word to 7777

I/O word

0-1777

LDMEM

0022

Load into memory

Absolute address

0-7777

LDWD

0023

Load I/O word with absolute

Absolute address, I/O word

0-1777

—
-

address

RDMEM

0026

Read memory to output register

Absolute address

0-7777

MOVWD

0033

Move I/O word from I/O

I/O word, I/O word

0-1777

I/O word

0-1777

address to I/O address

RDWD

0036

Read I/O word to output
register

CLRBIT

0103

Clear I/O bit

I/O word

0-PA*

SETBIT

0113

Set I/O bit

I/O word

0-PA*

LDBIT

0123

Load I/O bit with absolute

Absolute address, I/O word

0-PA*

I/O word, I/O word

0-PA*

I/O word

0-1777

address

MOVBIT

0133

Move I/O bit from I/O
address to I/O address

RDBIT

0136

Read I/O bit to output register

*PA = Assigned Partition Address

6-6

Table 6-1 (Cont)

PAL-143 Permanent Symbol Table Industrial 14 Instructions
Range
of

Symbolic

Octal

Meaning

Argument

The following instructions are compatible with first generation PDP-14:

TXF

4000

Test input for OFF

Input number

0-777

TXN

6000

Test input for ON

Input number

0-777

TYF

5000

Test output for OFF

Output number (9 bit)

0-777

TYN

7000

Set output for

Output number (9 bit)

0-777

SYF

1000

Set output OFF

Output number (9 bit)

0-777

SYN

3000

Set output ON

Output number (9 bit)

0-777

TRM

0026

Transfer memory to output

Value to be transferred

0-7777

Each of these symbols can be used in PAL-143 source
programs without definition by the user. These symbols
must not be used in PAL-143 source programs as symbolic

Both symbolic addresses and assigned symbol values are
in the user symbol table. Thus, the number of
symbols defined as addresses, added to the number of
entered

addresses or in assignment statements.

symbols with assigned values, may not exceed 792. When
this

The following are pseudo-instructions.
Symbolic

END
EOT
FLD 1
LOG
PAGEJ
PRE

symbol capacity is exceeded, the following message is

typed

*SMBOFLW

Meaning

End of source program
End of tape in a segmented program

Recovery requires the user to segment his program and to
assemble it in parts.

Memory Field 1
Set location counter

Special Characters and Operators

Page jump to start of next page

Several characters of the Teletype keyboard have special

Preset timers and counter

meaning to PAL-143.

CNTR - Counter
SEC - Timer with sec increments
TSEC - Timer with .1 sec increments

An example is the slash (/) which

denotes the start of a comment. Another example is the
carriage return,

which terminates a statement line. Table

6-2 contains all legal characters in the operation portion of
a

PAL-143 statement (namely, the statement exclusive of

any comment field).

If any other character appears in the
operation portion of a PAL-143 statement, the "I" error

User Symbol Table

The PAL-143 symbol table can accommodate 792 symbols.

(illegal

6-7

character) is generated.

Table 6-2

Addition and Subtraction — The + and - characters can be

PAL-143 Special Characters

numbers - usually for
addressing purposes. The statement JMP START +2 in the
octal

following program segment causes an unconditional

Use in PAL-143

Character

and

symbols

with

used

to the second location after the location labeled

(plus)

Combines symbols or values by
2's complement addition

(minus)

Combines symbols or values by

jump

START

(location 102 and the TN PB3 instruction).

LOC 100
START, TN PB 1
JFN OUT

2's complement subtraction

TNPB3
(logical OR)

Combines symbols or values by a
logical

(shift)

Shifts a value one octal digit left

(space)

Separates

JMP START -H2

from

instructions

operands and otherwise formats
the source program

The minus
(tab)

also

used;

for

example, JFF

operands and otherwise formats
the source program

assigns a value to each label;

Separates

from

instructions

(carriage return)

Terminates a statement

(slash)

Terminates the operation part of
a

all

Logical OR

- The logical OR character (!) can be used in

and

starts

PAL-143 programs to combine values of symbols or octal
numbers. The result is the bit-by-bit inclusive OR of the
two values. Table 6-3 lists the resultant value when any two

symbols

used

octal digits are combined with the

statement

Identifies

PAL-143 then computes the

symbolic addresses which contain operators

and symbols.

comment
(comma)

can

JFF to the second location before the
SOLAN-2
The location counter of PAL-143
labeled
SOLAN.
location
values of

sign

causes a

character.

symbolic addresses

(equals)

Assigns

values

Table 6-3

symbols
Inclusive

directly

(period)

When
program,

encountered
is

assigned

the

Octal

value

Digit

OR For Octal Numbers

Resultant Value

equal to the present value of the

PAL-143 location counter
1

Line feed

Form feed

Rubout

Leader/trailer (null)

The following characters are ignored in the PAL-143 source
program, but they do not generate errors:

6-8

When numbers containing two or more digits are combined,

Pseudo-Instructions

each

Pseudo-instructions are included

digit

the result

corresponding digits

obtained by combining the

the original numbers using Table

listing,

6-3.

stored

the PAL-143 program

on the source paper tape, to

direct the

assembly process. Pseudo-instructions are not translated

1234:2460=3674

into Industrial

14 machine code. However, they do affect

translation

other

PAL-143 has six
The operator can be used

PAL-143

instructions

machine

into

code.

LOC

pseudo-instructions, including the

and END statements, mentioned earlier in this chapter.

the following

manner:

END - The END pseudo-instruction marks the end of a

RDMEM 15

27 translates to RDMEM 0037

source
current

The values of symbols can also be combined with the colon
(:)

program and directs PAL-143 to terminate the
assembly pass. The complete assembly process

requires

character. For example:

either

two or three

(depending on the

passes

assignment of I/O devices). During the assembly process,
the source tape

0N =
SOLA= 1500
RDMEM SOLA ON translates to RDMEM 1501
1

Industrial

read

by PAL-143 and translated

into

14 machine code. The END statement terminates

the current

PAL-143 to

pass and causes

halt while the

source tape is reloaded to begin the next assembly pass.

Period - The period (.) is a special symbolic address used in

Because the

END statement halts the reading of a paper

PAL-143.

tape

assembly, any

value changes for

Its

each instruction and

always equal to the present value of the PAL-143 location

source

(often

"dot") and the

read

and

information

END

statement

present on the
is

the source program and can be read with the Editor. The

assembly process is faster if lengthy comments and program

operators.

documentation are written after the END statement.

The period is most useful with small (less than
best

performed

EOT — The pseudo-instruction EOT (end of tape) enables a
long PAL-143 program to be segmented and recorded on
more than one source paper tape. The EOT is typed as the

JFF .-H is a variation of this instruction, which causes the
next instruction to be executed for both states of the TEST

last

Because the TEST flag is cleared in both instances, the

last

instruction

the

For

-i-,

10) octal numbers; large jumps are
PAL-143 with true symbolic addresses.

flag.

after

.H2 (read, JFF dot plus 12) specifies JFF to

the twelfth octal (tenth decimal) location after the JFF
instruction.

tape

not read by
PAL-143. However, the comments are a permanent part of

counter. Jump instruction operands can contain the period

example, JFF

during

JFF

.-i-l

can be used to unconditionally clear

statement on all source tapes except the last tape; the

must

pseudo-instruction.

tape

statement

the TEST flag.

concluded
each

with

instance

that

the
the

END
EOT

read during an assembly pass, PAL-143 stops

and types EOT. The next source tape

The period can also be used with two-location instructions

assembly continues. This procedure

repeated for each

such as JMP or JMS. However, the value of the period is the

source tape in the complete program.

then loaded and

value of the location counter when the second half of the
instruction

assigned to

its

location;

JMP .-H2, therefore,

LOC - The LOC pseudo-instruction directs PAL-143 to set

causes a transfer to the third location which follows the

location counter to the operand value of the LOC. As
many LOC statements as desired can be used; however, if
no LOC statement is present, PAL-143 assumes a LOC
0000 statement at the beginning of the program.

JMP. Assuming that no two-location instruction follows the

its

JMP, the jump is to the second instruction in the sequence.
For example:

LOC 200
JMP .+2

translates to

203 JMP
201 203 (201

TN 1

202 TN 1

TN2

203 TN 2

-1-

The LOC statement can advance or reset the location
counter to any desired value. If the LOC statement returns

6-9

the location counter to an earlier value, any previously

PAGEJ — The PAGEJ

assembled instruction at that location is lost. For example.

causes

PAL-143

(page jump)

include

pseudo-instruction

program

assembled

the

whatever instruction is necessary to transfer control to the

LOG 50

first

TN LSI
TN LS2

location of the next Industrial 14 memory page. The

actual code generated depends on the current value of the

location counter.

Instruction

Generated

Current Location

LOG 50
SN SOLA

First location in a memory page

none

Last location in a memory page

NOP

Any other memory location

JMP

377+1

the next instruction is not assembled as the first or last

in
the page, PAL-143 supplies a JMP
operand of the JMP instruction is 1 plus
The
instruction.
of
current
location counter value with 377. The
the
the OR

instruction

results

location.

the assembly of two instructions for the same
The first instruction {TN LSI) is lost from the

the

JMP instruction always jumps to the first location of the
next memory page.

The LOG statement can have an expression or a symbolic

The PAGEJ pseudo-instruction also acts as a LOG .: 377-H
in instances where a JMP instruction was assembled. Thus,

assembly;

Industrial

location

will

contain

assembled instruction for SN SOLA.

operand. All terms of the expression must be previously
defined to enable

PAGEJ supplies the necessary Industrial 14 instruction to
transfer control to the beginning of the next memory page

PAL-143 to set the location counter to

the proper value. For example:

and also sets the PAL-143 location counter to that location.

PRE -

(Preset)

pseudo-instruction

causes

PAL-143 to

preset a timer or counter (up or up/down) at a particular

SOLAF.SFSOLA

I/O address to an octal preset value.

/LEAVE 8 LOCATIONS BEFORE STARTING
/NEXT PROGRAM SEGMENT

PRE (I/O NUMBER) (FUNCTION TYPE)
(PRESET VALUE)

LOCSOLAF-i-10

Where

I/O Number =

1400-1776 (even number only)
Function Type =

CNTR — up or up/down counter
SEC — Timer using sec increment.
TSEC — Timer using .1 sec increment.
1

The value of SOLAF is assigned at assembly time and the

LOG statement sets the location counter to the value of
SOLAF plus 10 (octal). Thus, the value of a LOG statement

Preset value, in octal =

0-1777.

may be determined at the time of assembly.
The pseudo-instruction

LOC.:377-i-1

causes

The PRE instruction does not generate machine language

PAL-143 to

advance the location counter to the first location of the

but

next Industrial 14 memory page. The statement is evaluated

internal

PAL-143 as:

(.)

OR'ed with 377 (octal) plus 1." If the location counter
1312, for example, the result of the OR

LOG

statement

sets

the

location

when the tape

function

used

load

the

FLD 1 - (Field 1) pseudo-instruction causes PAL-143 to

1377 and the

counter

punched on the binary output tape to preset the

Industrial 14 memory.

"The current value of the location counter

1400

store the Industrial

14 instructions that follow in Field

starting with location 0000.

(13778 -Hg).

6-10

PAL-143 INTERROGATION
The input of PAL-143 consists of an ASCII source tape of

Location field -

the four-digit octal address of the

Industrial

which

location

the Industrial 14 instructions generated from the Editor.

contains the assembled instruction.

The input device is requested by the user in response to the
PAL-143 message:

entries in the field.

*SRC - The Industrial 14 program should be read-in

Only assembled instructions have

Code field -

contains the numeric value of the

with what device? The output of PAL-143 consists of

code

an assembly

assignment statements, or the LOC

and

table,

listing

with error messages, a symbol

punched binary tape. The outputs are

requested by the user

assembled

for

instructions,

pseudo-instruction.

response to two PAL-143

messages:

Source statement

contains the line of user program as
read from the source tape.

*BIN - Is binary output required;
what device?

so,

source

statement

exceeds

the

characters,

one output

short and

PAL-143 will break the

line

too

*LST — Is an assembly listing required; if so, on

statement into two or more output

what device?

lines,

preceding

the

second

and

later lines with an asterisk.

The responses to the three messages are:
L — The input or output is requested and directed to

At the end of the program listing PAL-143 types:

the low-speed device.

ERR LINES—

H — The input or output is requested and directed to
the high-speed paper tape punch.

denotes the

number

decimal)

the

MEM BRK -

the

specifies

memory
Binary Output
The PAL-143 binary output is a paper tape. This can be
used

input to

lines

(in

program

which contain at least one error.

RETURN - The output is not requested.

debugged.

source

occupied

ODP-143 where the program can be

A punched code at the end of the paper tape

actual

locations

the

number
(in

octal)

assembled

program. ^This

not the largest

address;

count

the

locations used.)

(checksum) is used by ODP-143 when the tape is read Into
memory to verify reading accuracy.

Assembly Listing
The assembly listing

contains

the

original

Symbol Table
The PAL-143 symbol table is an alphanumeric listing of all

source

statements, the numeric value of the generated Industrial

user-defined symbols

14 machine code, and error codes. PAL-143 formats the

symbolic addresses and assigned values).

assembly

symbol is typed with the letter U in the column of values.

in.)

listing

into pages of

66 lines (approximately 1

and types the page number (in octal) at the top of each

Symbols

output page.

which

are

the source program (namely, all

defined

Any undefined

equating

them with

undefined symbols are assigned the value -i-O. Thus, if the

PB1=PB0 + 1 is used and no statement defines
PBO, the symbol table contains PBO-U and PB1 -i-O. The
statement

The assembly listing contains four fields:

values of directly assigned symbols are typed as five-digit

Error Field —

contains letters which identify

assembly

errors

detected

numbers (with leading

all

the

zeros)

to distinguish

symbolic address values which

lines of the source program.

numbers.

6-11

are

them from

typed as four-digit

undetected errors

they

Error Messages

source statement can

Error messages are single letters typed as the first entry of

occur after the cause of the syntax error. These errors can

the line containing the source statement in error.

alphabetical order.

be detected after the cause of the syntax error is removed

and the statement is reassembled.

than one error is detected, a list of all error codes is typed,
in

contain

A maximum of six error codes is

typed for each line. If the same error occurs at more than

one place in the source statement, the error code is typed
only once.

Table 6-4 lists all errors recognized by PAL-143. The table

PAL-143 stops processing the source statement when

particular error and the action taken by PAL-143 when the

includes examples of source statements which cause the
it

error occurs.

encounters an S (syntax) error, (Table 6-4). Thus, the

Table 6-4
Errors Recognized by PAL-143

Action Taken

Meaning

Error Code

Address Error — the page address of a JFF

The machine code is generated for JFF

or JFN instruction is not on the same page

JFN 0; therefore, the code for the example
is JFN 0.

as the instruction.

Example:

At location 376

A
D

LEAVE,

JFN.-I-3

Double Defined Symbol Error — an instruction
references a symbol which has been defined

PAL-143 uses the first definition. The JMP A
in the example would jump to the TN SOLA

more than once in the source program.

instruction.

Example:
A,

TN SOLA

JFN OUT
JMP A

Illegal Character Error

- the statement

contains a character which is not acceptable

PAL-143 Ignores the illegal character. Thus the
example is interpreted:

to PAL-143.

Example:
I

JMP A#BC

Label or Assignment Error — the first
character of a symbol used in assignments or
labels is not a letter (A-Z) or the left-hand

member of an assignment statement is
numeric.

Example:

50= LSI

47,

JMP RESTART

6-12

JMP ABC

The label or assignment is ignored by PAL-143.

Table 6-4 (Cont)
Errors Recognized by PAL-143

Error Code

Meaning

Action Taken

IVI

Multiple Definition Error - a label is defined

The first definition is used and all others are

more than once In the source program.

Ignored by PAL-143. In the examples, A is

equal to the location which contains TN SOLB.

Example:

TN SOLB

IVI

JFN SOLBN

Operation Error — the source program contains

PAL-143 ignores the operation and all

an illegal operation e.g., two Instructions in

subsequent information. In the example,

the same statement.

the machine code Is generated as If the

statement were:

Example:

START, JMP TEST JMP

START,

JMP

TEST

Phase Error - A label has a different Pass 1
and Pass 2 value. This error is normally caused

The current value of the location counter Is

by a symbolic LOG statement in which the

GDE is undefined at the start of assembly,
LOG Is assumed; thus, GDE=0 and XYZ=0.
During the first pass, however, GDE is

operand is defined after it Is used.

used to define the label for each pass. Since

given the value 50 and on the second pass,

LOG GDE becomes LOG 50 and XYZ=50,
thereby causing the phase errors.

Example:
P

LOG GDE

XYZ,

JMP.+2

GDE=50
Redefinition Error — the source program

The symbols retain the original values and

attempts to redefine (using an assignment

the assignment statement is ignored.

statement) a PAL-143 permanent symbol
(see Table 6-1) or a previously defined
label.

Examples:

LOC50
JMP=400
ABC,

TN LSI

ABG=70

6-13

Table 6-4 (Cont)
Errors Recognized by PAL-143

Action Taken

Meaning

Error Code

not meaningful to the assembler.

The statement is evaluated from left-to-right,
up to the point where the error occurred.

Example:

Thus:

Syntax Error - the source statement is

ABC, JMP.+
LS1 + LS2,

LSI =

SOLA TN+=3

assigns

JFN SOLAN,

counter and generates the machine code for

ABC,

JMP.-^

ABC the current value of the location

JMP.; The value of LSI plus LS2 is stored in
the next memory location (without any

symbolic address). The statement LS1=does
not generate any machine code. The location

with label SOLA contains the machine code
for TN 0. The JFN SOLAN, is assembled as

JFN SOLAN.
Truncatior) Error - a single value exceeds 7777

In assigned values, the excess right-hand digits

octal, or the maximum argument value for

are ignored. Thus, the result of A=40543 -•- C

the instruction (Table 6-1 ) if maximum is less

A=4054 -H C. If the truncated value is used

as the operand of an instruction, PAL-143

than 7777.

substitutes the value

when the value is too

large. Thus the value of:

Examples:

C= 3

ABC = 375 +100
ABC
TN

A=40543-HC

ABC=375-t-100

TN ABC
is the following:

ABC=475

TNO
Undefined Symbol Error - an instruction
references an undefined symbol.

The undefined portion of the statement is set
equal to 0. Thus:

JMP XZZ 3 becomes
JMP
3 or JMP 3

Example:

-I-

XYZ = 50
U

-I-

JMP XZZ+3

where XZZ is not defined
Illegal Value Error

- a value given in the

source program cannot be evaluated by

The illegal digit is ignored, and the remainder of
the expression is evaluated. Thus:

PAL-143.

ABC = 402+5 = 407

Example:

V
LV

However, in the second case, the whole label

ABC=8402-i-5

4LS, TN

LS4

6-14

ignored.

Error Listing

assembly and to correct them without wasting time on Pass

The assembly

listing

includes

error

messages for

PAL-143

also

types

typed during Pass 2 of PAL-143

all

partial

errored
error

containing errors detected during Pass

lines.

listing
1.

2 of the assembly process. Although Pass

However,
all

generated,

the

user

can

proceed

Pass

errors are

without

correcting the errors and thereby generate a complete error

lines

In general, this

listing.

does not report all errors, because some errors are

listing

detected only during Pass 2. Furthermore, the listing may
report

undefined

symbols which are properly defined

the assembly

punch, all error

during Pass 2. For example,

listing is to

lines

be punched on the high-speed

detected on Pass 2 are typed on the

Teletype unit, in addition to being punched as part of the

complete listing on the high-speed punch.

ABC=CDE
CDE=27

The

error table output

controlled by

two characters

typed during the query sequence which is described later. If
results in

ABC being undefined at the end of Pass 1. ABC is

N is typed, the separate error tables are not typed. If the

therefore included in the table of undefined symbols (with
a value of +0).
1,

ABC will

assembly

However, since CDE is defined later in Pass

listing

to be output on the high-speed punch,

typing E causes Pass 1 errors to be recorded there also.

be defined equal to 27 on Pass 2 of the

assembly and an error is not generated for Pass 2.

Sample Output

A sample assembly output including the assembly listing
and

symbol

follows.

Several

errors

are

included

Although the Pass 1 error listing may be incomplete, it does

intentionally to illustrate the error codes in the assembly

enable the user to detect errors at an early stage of the

listing and symbol table.

6-15

/THE FOLLOWING PROGRAM SOLVES THE EQUATION
/S0LA=(LS1*PB2*/PB3+S0LA*/LS2) */PB5
/
/

SOLA=1005
LS1=41
LS2=16

PB2=7
PB3=10
PB5=12
LOC 200
TF
SOLA*
TF
TN

JFF
TF
TN

JFF
5CHK,

TN
J FN

SOLAN,
30LAF*
END

SN
SKP
SF

>•

LSI

PB2
P*B3
CK5
SOLA
LS2
SOLAN
PB5
SOLAF
SOLA

/TURN SOLA ON

SOLA

TURN SOLA OFF
-/

*BIN-L
*LST-L
*SRC-L

COMMAND STRING

SOLA*
TF
4415
TN
6010
TN
LV
0207 6012 5CHK*
ERF LINES- 0003 MEM BRK-0014

P
I

SOURCE
PROGRAM

LSI

0200
0208

F*B3
PBS

PASS 1
ERRORS

UNDEFINED SYMBOLS
CK5
OFF
TURN

-U
-U
-U

PASS 1
SYMBOL TABLE

*PAS

6-16

PAGE- 0001

PAL- 43/8
1

/THE FOLLOWING PROGRAM SOLVES THE EQUATION
/S0LA=<LS1*PB8*/PB3+S0LA*/LS2>*/PB5
/
/

SOLA=1005
LS1=415
LS2=16
PB2=7
PB3=10
PB5=12

0415
0016
0007
0010
0012
0S00
0200
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0210
0211
0212
0213

4415
4007
6010
2000
4800
6016

821 1

JFF

6012
2613
3200
0010
1400

LOG 800
SOLA*
TF
TF
TN
JFF
TF
5CHK>

SOLAN>
SOLAF*
END

TN
J FN
SN
SKP
SF

PASS 2
> LISTING

LSI

PB2
P*B3
CK5
SOLA
LS2
SOLAN
PBS
SOLAF
SOLA

/TURN SOLA ON

SOLA

TURN SOLA OFF

ERROR CODES

ERR LINES-0005

MEM BRK-0014

SYMBOL TABLE
CK5

-u

LSI

-00415
-00016

LS2
OFF
PB8
PB3
PBS
SOLA
SOLAF
SOLAN
TURN

-u

-00007
-00010
-00012
- 0200
- 0813
-

PASS 2
SYMBOL TABLE
(ADDRESSES ARE 4-DIGIT NUMBERS;
ASSIGNED VALUES ARE 5-DIGIT NUMBERS)

0811

-u

*PAS
• 8BS0

PAS

Spurious characters are typed
while binary is punched.

Pressing CONT will restart PAL-143/8,

6-17

CHAPTER 7
ODP-143

ONLINE DEBUGGING PROGRAM
ODP-143

Industrial

14 system.

Industrial

14 user

debugging programs compiled

computer-based debugging program for the
in

used

The nonprinting character LINE FEED is noted

primarily to assist the

this

manual by

straight

arrow pointing

downward (i).

BOOL-143 or assembled by PAL-143.
Example:

MODES OF OPERATfON
Two basic modes of ODP-143 operation exist: Program
and Run. Program mode is used to manipulate and modify
Industrial

programs.

programs

can

loaded,

mode.

this

verified,

Industrial

altered,

and

listed,

TNI

with

controlling

the

Industrial

equipment.

14
this

program

wiring and

mode, inputs and

output and internal functions can be achieved
both modes.

with a

control

program

debugging. Some commands are recognized only in Program

ON or OFF to check
equipment operation. Interrogation of

input,

concludes typing

ODP-143 COMMAND DESCRIPTION
ODP-143 has many commands to

outputs can be disabled and forced
field

User

line feed.

punched out on paper tape. The Run mode is used for
interacting

mode; others are recognized only in Run mode; still others
are recognized in both

that

modes. If the user types a command

not recognized

in the present mode of operation,
ODP-143 types the error message M? (mode error). The
is

command that caused the error is then ignored and the user

CONVENTIONS

may either change modes or type a new command.

The following conventions are used to describe the dialogue
between the user and ODP-143.

commands in ODP-143 are terminated by a carriage
When the carriage return is typed, ODP-143 acts on
the command. Any spaces typed by the user are ignored.
All

All characters typed

by ODP-143 are identified

return.

in this manual by an underline.

Examples:

Three types of commands exist in ODP-143. If a command

NOP

Typed by ODP-143

TNI

Typed by user

not typed

(syntax error)

its

proper form, the error message S?

typed. The three ODP-143 command type

forms are:
b.

The nonprinting character RETURN is noted in
this

manual

curved

arrow

(

^ ). No

character appears on the teleprinter when this

One or two letters that stand alone.

One or two letters followed by a single number.

One or two letters, followed by two numbers,

character is typed.

Example:

TNI^

User

concluded typing with

separated by a minus sign {-]. The first number

carriage return.

must be less than the second number.

7-1

Any command given in form c. can also be typed in form b.
Specific examples of these command forms are covered in

ODP-143 records the RUBOUT as the character ?
#ZN?_(Rubout)

The user intended to type ZM

understand the three forms, and that a command must be

#ZM
"

and

typed in the form expected by ODP-143.

done
#

following

the

Commands

pages.

this

important that the reader

manual

are

presented

therefore

strikes

the

RUBOUT key at this point.
ODP-143 ignores the
command and

specific

types

the

examples without presenting the general form. Commands

carriage return, and a number

that have limits (for instance, form c.) can be typed in form

sign

b. if only one entity is affected by the command.

The
For

purposes,

illustration

the

user

can

substitute

signal

to
a

readiness

command.
then types ZM,

further

user

followed by a carriage return.

any

program address. Industrial 14 input or
output number, or other parameter for those given in this
Industrial

NOTE

manual.

The RUBOUT key can only be used to ignore
commands that have not been acted on by

SWITCH REGISTER 5
To halt any printing (for a List or Interrogate command)

ODP-143

set Switch Register 5, on the front panel of the computer,

been followed by a carriage return).

to
To issue further commands, set SR 5 back to
example
following
The
mode.
Run
or
return to Program
demonstrates the use of this command.

(specifically,

those which have not

1 .

PROGRAM COMMANDS
The following set of ODP-143 commands enables the user

#LS 200-250
0200 TN Oil

List

symbolically the contents of

to:

locations 200 through 250

0201 JFF 207

Specify interface used

0202 TN 001
0203 TN 002
0204 JFN 207

Zero Industrial 14 memory

Read paper tape programs

Change memory field

Change these programs

List these changed programs

0205 SN 1001
0206 SKP
0207 SF 1001
0210 JMS

After

symbolically, the user sets Switch

location

console

210

listed

on the computer

omit the printing of

locations 021 1 through 0230.
g.

He then sets SR5 =

and ODP-143

returns to Program Mode -

Interrogate

input,

output,

and

internal

functions states

Ready

to accept further commands

RUBOUT KEY

Start Industrial 14 execution ectuion

Punch and verify new paper tape records of the
changed program.

the user types a command incorrectly or wishes to have
ODP-143 disregard a command for any reason, he can strike
If

the Teletype

Except for the Interrogation commands, these commands
are always used in the Program mode.

RUBOUT key, provided that he has not

already typed a carriage return to terminate the command.

7-2

Because Industrial 14 programs can be readily changed

with

ODP-143, the user must maintain an accurate record of the
current state of his program. This record may
be in the
form of ODP-143 generated listings; however, it is strongly
recommended that the user maintain a correct, current
version

this

program

original

its

"source" form

followed by

return

and

sign (#)

carriage

number
when it is fin-

ished.

Read Commands

(BOOL-143 or PAL-143 input). If major program changes
are required at a later date, the user will need
a correct and

Low-Speed Reader

debugged version of his original program, in the format of

carriage return, to direct

the BOOL-143 compiler, or the PAL-143 assembler, so

that

make changes with the Editor. A correct, current

he can

ODP-143 to

read a paper tape

from the low-speed reader unit of the Teletype console.
The paper tape must be in the binary form obtained from

program listing and paper tape record of each Industrial 14

the

program in BOOL-143 or PAL-143 source form is essential

143.

- The user types R, followed by a

BOOL-143 compiler, the PAL-143 assembler or ODP-

changes are to be made.

The procedure for reading paper tapes with the low-speed

Interface Commands

reader is as follows:

Installation of the Industrial

14 and the interface between
computer and the Industrial 14 must be
completed before using ODP-143. Upon start-up, ODP-143
will assume that an SO (Serial One)
command has been
the

external

issued
via

and that it is communicating with the Industrial 14

serial

line

interface through the utility port

the

user

(Parallel)

should

(output

the

Interface

The leader section of the tape must be

Switch the reader to START

The tape is read by ODP-1 43

When the tape stops, switch the reader to STOP

Remove the paper tape from the reader

Command PA

SS (Serial Six) respectively. The utility port

and the monitoring port are discussed in Chapter 9.

#SS)
#

Place paper tape in the Teletype's low-speed

positioned over the reading head

the monitoring port (output register
enter

Type R, followed by the RETURN key

reader.

ODP-143 is to use the parallel interface or the

serial line interface via

Specifies

that

the

ODP-143 communicate
with the Industrial 14

through the

serial

line

interface

via

the

monitoring

ODP-143 attempts to communicate with the Industrial

via

non-existent

interface,

"14

(zero

zero

all

locations

#R^

The

lowed by a carriage re-

user types R, fol-

ary program tape in the

low-speed

14 memory, type

Industrial

START. After the tape
is read, ODP-143 prints

memory) followed by a carriage return. ODP-143 will

OK. The

locations in the Industrial 14 4K or 8K memory.
Before reading a program into the Industrial
14, a ZM
command should be issued to avoid adding any irrelevant

user switches

all

the reader to

the PDP-8 or
PDP-11 console switch
presses

marked

The

user

types

ZM,

143

followed by a carriage
return. ODP-143 zeroes
all

locations in memory

and

types

OFF, re-

moves the tape and de-

instructions to the program.

#ZM ^
DONE

and

reader

switches the reader to

Zero Memory Command
zero

CONT switch on the computer con-

turn, then places a bin-

HUNG" or "14

STOPPED" message will be printed on the Teletype.

Press the
sole

port

(output register 6).
If

DONE,

types

the

number

sign

(#)

signal

readiness

further

mands.

7-3

CONT. ODP-

then

com-

High-Speed Reader

- The RH command is used to read

paper tapes with the high-speed reader, provided that the
PDP-8 or PDP-1 1 computer is equipped with this device.

The binary paper tape (output from ODP-143, BOOL-143
PAL-143) is first placed in the reader unit; the user then
types RH, followed by a carriage return. ODP-143 reads the
paper tape record into memory and types the period at the
or

instruction
that location to be typed symbolically (with its
The user can then alter the content of that

mnemonic).

next to
location by typing a legal Industrial 14 instruction,
the line
the content typed by ODP-143, before terminating
the
change
to
necessary
not
is
If
it
return.
with a carriage

content of the location, the user simply types a carriage
return after the instruction typed by ODP-143.

margin to signal readiness for a new command. (The
user need not press the CONT switch of the computer as in

#10:NOPTN7J

The

the R command).

content of location 10

left

NOP

from

#RH ^

changes the

user

TN7:

After placing the paper

modification is termina-

tape

the high-speed

ted by a carriage return

reader,

the user types

and ODP-143 waits for
a new command.

RH, followed by a carriage return. The tape is
ODP-143
and
read

OK, carriage re-

prints

then

and

turn,

number sign when it is
ready for a new command.

line
Alternatively, a line feed can be used to terminate a
not
have
or
may
may
which
and
that is typed by ODP-143

been modified. This causes the next sequential location to

which
be automatically opened for modification. If a line
next
feed,
the
line
with
a
is
closed
was opened symbolically
location

The

leader section of the paper tape

must be positioned

used

opened symbolically. This feature can be
scan a series of Industrial 14 instructions by

also

continually typing line feed.

over the reader head before the RH command is typed.

ODP-143 types the error message "Checksum Error" when
with the

a checksum error occurs while reading a paper tape
R or RH command. This error message indicates that the

The user opens location

#10: TN 007 \

10 but does not modify
content. Termina-

0011:NOP TN10 ^

the

tape was incorrectly read and should be reread. If the same
bad
tape generates this error consistently, the paper tape is
PAL-143.
or
BOOL-143
and should be repunched from

tion

location

tial

opened

Change Memory Field

tion.

An FO or F1 is typed previous to an Open or List command
or 1, respectively. Upon
memory field
ODP-143 assumes access to memory field 0.

startup,

contents

list

tions

return

and

new

com-

loca-

memory field

typing

the

appro-

The following example shows the manner

which an

Each line
Industrial 14 program could be completely typed.
open
automatically
to
key
feed
line
the
is terminated by

Symbolically

following a legal Industrial

carriage

mand.

the next sequential location.

Location

The user termina-

request

Open Location Commands
a

typing a number sign to

priate command.

Open

modifica-

for

ODP-143 responds by

User can now change or

#F1^
#

feed

tes this second line with

to enable the user to change or to list contents of locations
in

line

causes the next sequen-

- A

colon

(:)

a line

terminated by a

carriage return, the line feed can be typed at any time to

typed

open the next location, as illustrated.

14 address causes the content of

7-4

#60:NOPTN2 }

The

types a car-

user

riage return after

0061:NOP JFF65;

fying

0062: NOP TN3I

At location 65, the user

modi-

reverts to opening loca-

60;

tions numerically. Line

location

ODP-143 responds witli
number sign. Tlie user

0063:NOP TF10;
0064:NOP JFN67i
0065:NOP SN1010I
0066:NOP SKP|

0067 NOP SF 1010 ^
:

really

wants to enter a

group

terminated by a

carriage return.

instructions;

Open I/O Status Word

he types a line feed and

A right hand caret >

the next location (61)

address causes ODP-143 to print the type of preset internal

The

opened.

(

)

following a legal Industrial 14 I/O

function and its I/O status word. This command is normally

user

continues to type pro-

used to examine or alter timer and counter presets and

gram

counts.

instructions,

ter-

Opening

timer and counter even address I/O

minating each line with

status word reveals the current time or count, in decimal.

a line feed.

Opening a timer and counter odd address I/O status word
reveals the timer or counter preset.

Open a Location Numerically - A slash (/) following a legal
Industrial

14 address causes the content of that location to

be typed numerically. The user can alter the content, close
the location unaltered, or close the location (altered or

After opening the I/O status word, the user can alter the
type of internal function (CNTR to TSEC) and/or preset or

unaltered),

and open the next sequential location. This

count, close the location (altered or unaltered), or open the

command

can also be used with the colon

next sequential location.

(:)

open

locations in both symbolic and numeric form.

#65/30101

The

0066/0010 ;

sequential

0067/2010 ^

numerically, by placing

line

feed

locations,

#1601 > TSEC 0600

after each

line except the last.

modifications

per-

formed

Example 1
To examine preset of Timer 1601 type:

opens three

user

are

Open Timer 1601 odd
status word. ODP-143
prints that the internal

in this example

function

1/10

although the user does

second

have this option.

and that its preset is 60

timer

(TSEC)

seconds.

The following example

illustrates

both the symbolic and

numeric opening of

opened

registers. The same register can be
both forms on the same line. No modifications

Example 2

are performed in the example although they could be made

To examine current count and preset of Counter 1740,

at any time.

type:

#60/60021
0061/2065 1

The user opens location

#1 740 > CNTR 0022 ;

Open up Counter 1740

63, symbolically, after

1741 > CNTR 0040

even

I/O

status word.

0062/6003 ;

0063/5010 TF1 01 0;

numerically, by simply

the internal function

0064:JFN070 ;
0065:SN 101 0/3010 ;
0066/1110 ;
0067/2010 ;
0070/2010 ;
0071/0010 ^

typing the colon (:). By

a counter and that

its

had

been

ODP-143

opened

prints

that

following the line with

current count = 22. By

typing

line

feed,

location

the next

opened

ODP-143

line

feed,

prints

again

same form; thus,

that the internal func-

locations 64 and 65 are

tion is a CNTR and that

opened

its preset =

the

symbolically.

7-5

40.

0216:1000

Example 3
To alter a Counter 1660 with a preset of 20 to a timer with
a preset of 40 seconds, type:
#1 660 > CNTR0011 SEC

Open

Counter

1661 >CNTR 0020 SEC 40

status

word. ODP-143

0217:JFF227
0220:JMS
0221:1012
0222:JFF227

1660

0223:TN1001
0224:JFF227
0225 :SN 1005
0226:SKP
0227 :SF 1005
0230:JFF234

prints "CNTR" and the

current count "0011".

The

SEC,

types

user

changing the counter to
a

and

timer

current

the

sets

time to

zero.

The user can modify the function of the LS command to

After pressing the line
key,

feed

ODP-143

list

only certain program instructions, or he can

list

all

prints "CNTR" and the

program instructions within the limits by not exercising the

counter preset "0020".

option.

The

the contents of two special registers,

then

types

SEC and timer

1660's

user

The user controls the locations listed by changing

W (word) and M

When locations W and M are modified, the LS
command types only certain locations within the limits
(mask).

preset (40 seconds).

thereby

specified,

searching

for

particular

instructions.

Table 7-1 lists the LS command useage.

Further discussion concerning I/O status words is presented
in Chapter 9.

List Commands

Table 7-1

Use of the LS Command

Symbolically — Once a program is loaded into
memory, the LS command is used to list the program
symbolically. The program is listed with instruction
mnemonics for all locations within the limits specified by
the LS command. The user specifies the limits of the listing
by following the LS with two numbers.
List

NOTE
The carriage return ^ must be typed after the
LS command and after all other commands

Change

To List:

Mto:

Wto:

All SF instructions
All SN instructions

7000
7000

SF or 1000
SN or 3000

All JMP instructions

7777

All JMS instructions

7777
7777

JMP or 0024
JMS or 0124

All

JMR instructions

JMR or 0056

described in this chapter.

All JFN instructions

7000
7400
7400

JFF or 2000
JFF or 2000
JFN or 2400

TN or TF instructions
TF instructions
All TN instructions

4000
6000
6000

TF or 4000
TF or 4000

Any particular instruction

7777

All locations within limits

0000
1777

The instruction
NOP or 0000
The I/O number

All JFF or JFN instructions
All JFF instructions

#LS200-230^
0200:TN011
0201:JFF207
0202:TN001
0203:tN002
0204:JFF207
0205:SN1001
0206:SKP
0207 :SF 1001
0210:JFF215
0211:NOP
0212:NOP
0213:NOP
0214:NOP
0215.JMS

The user requests that
ODP-143 list the locations from 200 to 230,

All

inclusive. If the user has

TN or 6000

not altered the content
of

M and W, all loca-

tions within these limits

are typed.

A particular I/O number

The user lists the complete set of instructions

not

initial

altering

values of

The user alters the locations M and W In the same manner
that Industrial 14 program locations are altered. The colon

the

M and

(specifically

or slash

M = 0000 and W=NOP).

used to open the location; after the location is

changed, it is closed with a carriage return.

7-6

#M/0000 8000^

The mask is changed to

0205/3001

7000.

0206/0010
0207/1001

The user requests that
ODP-143 list the loca-

The word is changed to

0210/2215
0212/0000

tions from

0213/0000
0214/0000
0215/0124

are typed (numerically)

#W:NOPSF;i

SF.

The following examples

list

different instructions within

the same limits by changing the M and

#M /0000 7000

W locations.

The user changes M and

0205:SN1001
0225 :SN 1005

instructions

0244:SN1006

The user changes M and

0261 :SN 1007

W to

W so that only the SN

list

are

listed.

only the JMP

instructions within the

#M/7000 7777
^
#W: SN000 JMP j

limits of the command.

#LS200-267^

The

0267 :JMP

content of M and

have

#M/7777

the

#W:JMPJFF264J

tions within the limits.

#LS200-267 ^

user

W to

such

instruc-

ODP-143

types

user

content of

W to

instructions

264

list the

matches

typed

then

the Teletype.

The user requests that
ODP-143 type numerically

all

JMS

instruc-

0215/0124

tions within the limits

0220/0124

specified.

#M/7777 >

#W:JMSSKP^

The

ODP-143 type all SKP

user requests that

single

JFN 264 instruc-

#LN200-235

tion

contained

0206/0010

instructions

0226/0010

cally.

within

numeri-

List Numerically - If a section of the Industrial 14 program

to be listed in numeric form, the

are

numerically

the specified limits.

LN command is used.

All locations within the limits specified will

be typed. The

Interrogation Command

LN command is subject to the M and W locations described

for the LS command.

The following examples
command.

The original content of
all

0234/0124

and ODP-143 types the

then compared with W.

#LN200-235

changes the

JFN

Otherwise,

0256:JFN 264

The

and W.

memory, masked with

^:NOPJMS ^

period to request a new

not

the content of M, and

the

command.

has

the limits is taken from

#M/0000 7777^

#LS200-267^

user

the content of

each instruction within

and

#W:JFF264JFN264^

locations

0235/1000

instructions

however,

the

200 to 235,
All

0232/0000
0233/0000
0234/0124

DP- 143 type all

exist,

#M/7777^

changes the

JFF 264

altered

0216/1012
0217/2227
0220/0124
0221/1012
0222/5227
0223/7001
0224/2227
0225/3005
0226/0010
0227/1005
0230/2234
0231/0000

;)

m-. SF OOP SN^
#LS200-267^

inclusive.

interrogate

consecutive' input,

function states, type

output and

internal

followed by the limits of inputs,

outputs, or internal function states desired. ODP-143 will
illustrate

the

use

the

output the desired

input, output,

internal

function

number and then its state, N or F. This command can be
issued in both Program and Run modes.

#LN200-235^
0200/601

#1 200

0201/2207

Interrogate

the

single

input 200 and type

0202/6001

200 N

0203/6002

state.

its

ODP-143 types

the input (200) and its

0204/2207

state (N).

7-7

A number sign

(#)

Start Command

14 program

Industrial

ready for the next com-

execution, type S, followed by a carriage return. ODP-143

mand.

starts execution of the

enter

location
#1

Run mode and

typed whenODP-143 is

start

program in Industrial 14 memory at
(places the Industrial 14 in internal mode.) To

outputs

restart program execution following a halt of the program,

1200-1210 ^

Interrogate

1200 through 1210 and

the S command turns outputs ON that were ON when the

1200N

type out the respective

program was halted.

1201 N

states.

ODP-143 types

1202 F

outputs

1200 through

1203 F

1204F

1210 and the state of
each.

ting that

memory

has entered

Run mode.

1210N
Interrogate
internal

the

Punch Commands

single

function 1450

type

and

its

Low Speed Punch - The user can generate a paper tape

state.

record of his Industrial 14 program on the low-speed punch

ODP-143 types the
function
internal

ODP-143

and types an @, indica-

1207 F

1450 F

execu-

Industrial

1206F

}

types
starts

tion of the program in

1205 F

#1 1450

user

The

by using the following ODP 1 43 procedure:

(1450) and its state (F).

A number sign is typed

Type P, followed by a carriage return.

Turn the paper tape punch unit of the Teletype

when ODP-143 is ready
for the next command.

ON.
I/O Interrogate Disables

The

Interrogate Disables command interrogates and lists all

Press the

CONT switch of the PDP-8 or PDP-1

computer console.

inputs or outputs that are currently disabled. This command is helpful when the user desires to reenable inputs

and outputs before or during execution of the Industrial 14
program. The following example illustrates a typical re-

After the tape is punched, turn the punch unit

OFF, and remove the punched tape.

sponse to this command.

Press the PDP-8 or PDP-1 1

CONT switch.

#ID^
This procedure is illustrated as:

types

ID^

10 D

User

47D
500
66D

ODP-143 prints each in-

output

I/O

number and the

letter

put

indicating that the

150

15? D

input or output

3^D

abled.

#P^

The user requests that
ODP-143 punch a paper

DONE
#

tape record of the pro-

gram

instructions

Industrial

dis-

14 memory.

When the tape has been
ODP-143
punched,
types DONE, carriage

711 D
721 D

723 D
1127 D

1300D

7-8

then

return,

and

number

sign (#) to re-

quest a

new command.

High Speed Punch - To punch a paper tape record
high-speed

punch, type

carriage return.

PH (punch

on the

high) followed

When the tape is read, switch the low-speed
reader to FREE, and remove the paper tape.

Press the PDP-8 or PDP-1 1

by a

ODP-143 punches the paper tape without

further operator action

(it is not necessary to follow the
operating procedure given for the P command).

When using the VH command, it is not necessary to follow
the above procedure. Instead, simply place
the paper tape

#PH J

The user types PH fol-

DONE
#

be punched. The com-

The tape

mand

error-free verification.

lowed by the limits to
terminated by

CONT switch.

the reader and type VH, followed by a carriage
return.
is

then

read

and

ODP-143

prints

OK after

a carriage return. ODP-

143 punches the tape,

and

DONE,

types

carriage return and then
a

number sign (#) when

ready for a new

command.

Whenever this message occurs, a new paper tape should

The high-speed punch button must be activated to
the paper tape.

The

tape Verify commands compare the tape being
read
with the Industrial 14 memory. If the content
of the tape
does not agree with the content of memory, ODP-143
types
"Data Error".

punched and the old tape destroyed. If the error message
punch

can be shut off after the tape is punched.

"Checksum Error" is typed, the paper tape has a bad
checksum punched at its end, and a new tape should
be
punched.

Verify Commands

Once the

user has punched a paper tape record of
his
program, the following command can be used to
validate

that no punching errors have occurred.

It is good practice to verify
the paper tapes, generated
during the debugging state, to be certain that
they are

errors,

#v;

Verify the paper tape in

#0K

Punching errors, which cause tape verification
do not occur often, but such errors can change the

accurate.

user's program with dangerous results.

the low-speed reader by

comparing
dustrial

with

In-

memory.

RUN MODE COMMANDS
The following set of ODP-143 commands enables the user

ODP-143 prints OK
when the tape is veri-

to:

fied.

Interrogate input, output, and internal function
states

#vh;>

Verify the paper tape in

the

#0K

high-speed

by comparing

reader
it

Enable and disable inputs and outputs

Force ON and OFF inputs or outputs

Halt Industrial 14 program execution.

with

Industrial 14 memory.
ODP-143 prints OK
when the tape is verified.

Except for Interrogation commands, these commands
only be used

The first command (V) uses the low-speed reader unit
of
the Teletype console.

When

using the

Interrogation Command

To interrogate one, or a series of consecutive input, output

Type the command V, followed by a carriage

and internal function states, type I, followed by the limits

return.

of the I/O number of inputs, outputs or internal
desired.

Place the paper tape in the low-speed reader.

Switch the low-speed reader to START.

may

Run mode. The presence of Run mode is

exemplified when an @ is typed on the Teletype.

V command, the

following procedure applies:

functions

As in the Program mode, ODP-143 will output the

desired input, output or internal function I/O
number and
then its state. Refer to Interrogation Command in
Program

mode for example.

7-9

ID Interrogate Disables Command

flNPUT

The Interrogate Disables Command interrogates and lists all

jDISABLE

outputs

inputs

are

that

currently

disabled

INPUT

STATE AS
'tested by

during

execution of the Industrial 14 program. This command

controller

available in
identical to the Interrogate Disables Command,

Program mode. Refer to Interrogation Disables Command
in Program

mode for examples.
FORCED STATE

Disable and Enable Commands

ODP-143 can logically override the input or output state
devices

wired

the

Industrial

14 Controller;

L::r_^

internal

functions cannot be overridden in this fashion. The
input or
override is accomplished by first disabling the
logical

output and then forcing

to either the

loUTPUT
OUTPUT .DISABLE

ON or OFF state.

STATE AS
SET BY

Figure 7-1 illustrates this feature.

CONTROLLER
that

For an input, the state, as tested by the controller,
not disabled
state of the input converter when the input is
is

an
the forced state when the input is disabled. For
the
by
as
set
is
converter
output, the state of the output
and is the
control program when the output is not disabled

and

FORCED STATE
I

forced state when the output is disabled.

Disabling Inputs and Outputs

Figure 7-1

To disable an input or output, type Dl, followed by
range from
desired input or output number (I/O numbers

the

0-1377). To enable a disabled input or output, type EN,
followed by the desired input or output number.

@DI 275 J

@EN 1312)

Disable input 275

To force an input, output, or internal function ON,
numbers
FN, followed by the desired I/O number (I/O

Enable output 1312

range from 0—1777).

type

OFF, type

To force an input, output, or internal function

Any combination of inputs and outputs may be disabled at
the same time. The "disable" remains until it is

FF, followed by the desired I/O number.

removed.

Assuming the timer and

@FN 1612)

counter partition to be

Force Commands

1600,

forced either
After the input or output is disabled, it can be
(found
output
or
input
an
of
or OFF. The current state

force

timer

counter 1612 ON.

by issuing an interrogation command) is the
it is

disabled, or the true state

if it is

forced state if

not disabled. This state

by the controller when processing Industrial 14

also used

instructions.

internal

function

may be forced to its

if the
opposite state, whether disabled or not. However,
return
can
program
output is currently enabled, the control
immediately. This
the output to its original state, almost

or setting internal
feature is particularly useful for clearing
memories, shift
functions such as timers, counters, retentive

for turning

@
Halt Program Execution Command

Any output or

registers, etc.,

Force input 15 OFF.

@FF 15)

halted by
The execution of an Industrial 14 program can be
OFF but
electrically
outputs
all
typing HP. ODP-143 turns
retains the

logic

state

for

interrogation;

then enters

External
Program mode and places the Industrial 14 into
before
OFF
forced
be
should
mode. Thus, all outputs

14 program. Internal functions retain
If the program is restarted again (by

halting the Industrial

the current state.
to their
typing S ) ) all outputs are switched ON according

which cannot be disabled. It is also helpful
an output that uses a sealing contact.

7-10

previously established states.
start

If program execution is to
with all outputs OFF, simply power the Industrial 14

Other Disable and Force features follow:

down, then back up.

During checkout, to prevent an output from
energizing at all, disable it and force it OFF.

NOTE
ODP-143 must be in Run mode

During checkout, to achieve a dry run when the
logic requires that a part be in place, disable the

part-in-place input and force it ON.

program

execution

stops

Industrial

Enter Program mode

the inputs that should be ON, and force them

Using the Disable/Force Feature

accordingly.

A practical example of the preceding discussion follows.
Figure 7-2 shows a control circuit, a Boolean equation, and

When an input is suspected to be intermittent,

ON the auto-

14 machine language that turns

Industrial

matic cycle light for one station on a transfer line. To turn
the

automatic cycle

either the

light

During checkout, when some inputs required
are not yet wired into the controller, disable

ON, without

actually

having

and force it to the state it should be

disable

in.

the

problem disappears, the input

intermittent, and the switch and/or input con-

MAIN CYCLE or CYCLE START pushbutton

verter should be checked.

ON, first disable and then force ON the CYCLE START
and MAIN CYCLE contacts.

I/O disables only remain in effect as long as the Industrial

14 is powered up. To clear all I/O disables, power down the
controller with the power supply ON/OFF switch.

CYCLE START
0245

MAIN
CYCLE

AUTOMATIC
CYCLE
LIGHT

ODP-143 SUMMARY
Tables 7-2 through 7-4 summarize the commands and error

1212

1251

messages for ODP-143. Specific values for inputs, outputs

and

program numbers have been used to describe the

commands and error messages. Any Industrial 14 location
address, input number or output number may be substitu-

AUTOMATIC
CYCLE
1212

ted in place of those used for illustration.

CYCLE
STOP
0246

Table 7-2

Program Mode Commands
1212 = 1251 »( 245 +[12I2»/ 246])

200 TF

1251

205
206
207

JFN

211

202 TF
203 JFF

245

207

210

2 04

1212

211

201

TN
JFN
SN
SKP
SF

246

Command

Function

211

1212

RUBOUT

1212

Ignore the previously typed command

(up to the last carriage return).

Figure 7-2

Verify the paper tape in the low-speed

Automatic Cycle Light Control Circuit,

reader by comparing it with Industrial

Boolean Equation and Industrial

14 Instructions

simulated

memory, noting

any

discrepancies.

VH
To

validate that the automatic cycle circuit remains

Verify the paper tape in the high-speed
reader

CYCLE START pushbutton is released, force the
CYCLE START contact 245 OFF. To turn the automatic
cycle light OFF, disable the CYCLE STOP contact 0246
after the

Industrial

comparing

simulated

with

the

memory,

noting any discrepancies.

and force it OFF. After the circuit is checked, the disabled

23:

inputs and outputs must be reenabled.

Open

location 23, symbolically, and

allow the user to modify its contents.

7-11

Table 7-2 (Cent)

Table 7-2 (Cont)

Program Mode Commands

57/

Open

location

Function

Command

Function

Command

57, numerically, and

Zero Industrial 14 memory

140-45

Interrogate the current states of inputs

allow the user to modify its contents.

1620>

40-45

Open status word for I/O address 1620
and

allow

the

modify

user

its

Interrogate

contents.

and

cun-ently

all

list

disabled inputs and outputs.

RETURN }

Close the currently open location and

Start Industrial 14 program execution

enter any legal modifications typed by

Industrial

14 in

ODP-143

will

(places

at address

the user.

"internal" mode).

LINEFEED|

the

open

cun-ently

location;

enter any legal modifications typed by

the

Industrial

form
and

communicate with

open the next sequential
14 location in the same

user;

(symbolically

allow

the

modify

its

Specifies

ODP-143

that

will

communicate with the 14 through the
serial line interface via

symbolically,

(by

typing

the utility port

(output register 1).

contents of locations 0-30,

List the

the

DA14-E parallel interface.

content.

LSO-30

via

numerically)

user

that

Specifies

the

instructions in mnemonic form).

Specifies

ODP-143

that

will

communicate with the 14 through the

LNO-10

serial line interface via

List the contents of locations 0-10,

numerically,

(by

typing

the monitoring

port (output register 6).

the

instructions in numeric octal form).

Change to memory field 1

open or

Punch a paper tape record of the
contents of Industrial 14 memory on

list

in order to

contents of locations in

that field.

the low-speed punch.

Table 7-3

Punch a paper tape record of the
contents of Industrial 14 memory on

@ Run Mode Commands

the high-speed punch.

Function

Command
Read a paper tape from the low-speed

11200-1220

reader.

Interrogate

the

current

state

outputs 1200-1220. This command
can also be issued in Program mode.

Read a paper tape from the high-speed
reader.

Open

mask

location

and

Interrogate

and

list

allow

modification.

Open

work

location

and

all

disabled inputs and outputs.

D150

Disable input 50.

EN1300

Enable output 1300.

allow

modification.

7-12

currently

Table 7-3 (Cont)

Table 7-4 (Cont)

@ Run Mode Commands

ODP-143 Error Messages And Causes

Command
FN 1660

Function

Error Message

Assuming timer and counter partition
to be at address

Cause

A non-octal digit is used in

a program (8 or 9).

600, force timer or

counter 1660 ON

A test or set instruction

FF1050

Force output 1050 OFF

references an

illegal

input

or output number (greater

Halt Industrial 14 program;

than 1777).

ODP-143

enters Program mode
c.

The address of a JFF

JFN is illegal (greater than
377).

Table 7-4

ODP-143 Error Messages And Causes
d.

A JMP or JMS instruction
references

Error Message

Cause

syntax

ODP-143

rule

for
e.

commands.

Each

ODP-143 command is in one of

location

the

second

part

instruction

typed on the same line as
the first part (for instance,

JMP 1567).

One or two letters witKno
numbers

following

The

two-word

the following forms:

not

simulated memory.

- The user has

Syntax Error
violated

which

(for

DATA ERROR

instance, ZM)

A data error has occurred on a
tape read by ODP-143 with the

V or VH command. The tape
One

two

letters

should be repunched.

followed by a number (for
instance, Dl 1234)

One

two

NO FIELD 1
letters,

An attempt has been made to
read or verify an 8K Industrial
14 memory.

followed by two numbers,
separated by a minus sign
(for instance,
first

14 STOPPED

1-20). The

ODP-143

has

attempted

communicate with an Industrial

number must be less

14 that is not running or is not

than the second number.

interfaced to the proper output
port.

When a command is not typed in
its

specified format, the S? error

results.

14 HUNG

Commands of form c can

instance, 15

has

attempted

communicate with an Industrial

be typed in form b without error
(for

ODP-143

14 that is not interfaced to the

the same as

proper output port.

15-5).

Number

error

CHECKSUM ERROR

- The user has

included an

illegal

program.

The

number in his
following

A checksum error has occurred
on a tape read by ODP-143 with
the R, RH, V or VH command.

The tape should be reread. (If R

conditions produce the code N?:

or RH,
first).

7-13

ZM should be executed

Table 7-4 (Cont)

ODP-143 Error Messages And Causes
Cause

Error Message

Mode error - The user has typed
command which is illegal in
the present mode of ODP-143.
ODP-143 has two such
a

modes: Program and Run.

Command Error - The user has
typed a command that ODP-143
does not recognize.

7-14

CHAPTER 8
PDP-8 OPERATIONS

This chapter describes the use of PDP-8 utility programs

developed

the

for

Industrial

System

OCTAL
NUMBER

(Loader and

PDP-8/L,8/E,
8/F a 8/M

The operation of the PDP-8 hardware system
(computer console and 33 ASR Teletype) Is described in
the PDP-8/E, PDP-8/M, and PDP-8/F Small Computer
Editor).

DOWN DOWN DOWN

DISPLAY LIGHTS
OFF

OFF

m m m

Handbook.
f

PDP-8 SWITCH AND SWITCH REGISTER OPERATIONS

The PDP-8
computer

For

Industrial

the user should be familiar with the

in this

and

DOWN DOWN

OFF

m m Q
^

programming

0QS

START,

STOP, CONT (continue), LOAD ADD (load address), DEP
(deposit)

OUT

operated by a series of switches on the

console.

purposes,

EXAM (examine) switches. The descriptions

OUT

DOWN

OFF

® © ®

chapter specify when these switches are to be used.

The switches are all spring-loaded and return to the normal
position after release.

DOWN

OFF

The Industrial 14 software will not run if the SING STEP
or SING INST switches are set on the PDP-8 console. These

Q§

switches must always remain OFF. (The SING INST switch

does not exist on the PDP-8/L, 8/E, 8/F, or 8/M consoles.)
In the

PDP-8/1, the top of these two switches should be in

the IN position, with the bottom

DOWN DOWN

UP position.

The twelve switches of the PDP-8 Switch Register are
groups

# m

OUT. In the PDP-8/L,

8/E, 8/F and 8/M, the SING STEP switch should be in the

arranged

DOWN

are

different

colors

aid

four groups of three switches each. Adjacent
switches

OFF

identification.

Figure

8-1

shows every

possible

switch

pattern

for

DOWN

3-switch group. Eight patterns exist and these are numbered
0—7. The chart is essentially the octal-binary equivalents
for

the

digits

0-7, with

switch

representations.

For

example, to set a 3-switch group to the number 4, the first
switch

set ON,

OFF

OUT

and the second and third switches are set

OFF.

7
NOTE
A PDP-8/1 switch is ON when the top is OUT
and the bottom is IN. A PDP-8/L, 8/E, 8/F and
8/M switch is ON when it is in the UP position.

00^
Figure 8-1

PDP-8/1, 8/L, 8/E, 8/F and

Switch Settings for Octal Digits 0-7

8-1

8/M

The following example further illustrates the use of Figure
8-1 To specify the octal number 5 (corresponding to the
binary code 101), the switches, as shown in Figure 8-2. are

010

000 000

PDP-8/I

set as follows:

Switch 1 = ON
Switch 2 = OFF
Switch 3 = ON

OUT

DOWN

Switch Register Set to 22008

Figure 8-4

PDP-8/I

PDP-8/L,8/E,
8/F a 8/M

Figure 8-2

As previously

Switches Set to Octal

stated, the Switch

PDP-8/I

Number 5

Switch Register Set to 02008

Figure 8-5

switches, arranged in four 3-switch groups. Each group of

switches represents an octal digit. Thus, a four-digit octal

number defines the settings for all 12 switches. Figures 8-3,
8-4 and 8-5 show the switch settings for three octal values.

Loading the RIM Loader

To store the RIM loader in memory, proceed as follows.
Before the loader program is stored in PDP-8 memory, the

Data Field and Instruction Field switches should be set to
(if

the computer

has

memory)

or to

(if

the

computer has 8K of memory). If a PDP-8/E, 8/F, or 8/M is
used, the Data and

PDP-8/I

Instruction

Fields are set by Switch

SR 6-11 and Extended Address Load
Key (EXTD ADDR LOAD). First, set the Indicator
Selector switch to STATUS, then set SR 6-8 for the
desired Instruction Field. SR 9-11 should be used to
indicate the desired Data Field. To specify both Instruction
Register switches

Field

and Data Field 1, set only bits 8 and 1 1 to 1; then
EXTD ADDR LOAD key. If a PDP-8/L is used,

press the

Figure 8-3

MEM PROT (memory protection) switch must be in the
being
DOWN position (off) while the loader program

the

Switch Register Set to 16348

stored in memory.

PDP-8 LOADER PROGRAM
Before any PDP-8 based program can be loaded

Set the Switch

into the

high-speed

PDP-8 memory, a loader program must be stored that will
read the binary format paper tape on which these programs

RIM Loader

settings,

listed

table, depending on whether the system

low-speed

The loader program is then used to transfer
BOOL-143/8, ODP-143/8 and all other system software
into the PDP-8 memory.

are stored.

Teletype

reader

in
is

the following

equipped with a

high-speed

paper tape

reader. After each setting, press the operation switch noted
at the right of the setting.

8-2

Switch Register Setting

Low Speed

Operation Switch

High Speed

7756
6032

7756
6014

6031

6011

5357

6036
7106
7006

6016
7106
7006

7510
5357
7006

5510
5374
7006

6031

6011

5367
6034

5367
6016
7420
3776
3376
5357

7420
3776
3376
5356

LOAD ADD

the instructions have been loaded incorrectly, restart the

switch-setting process.

the

RIM instructions have been

loaded

Binary

Loader can be stored

first

number

listed

DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
DEP
the

initial

memory using the RIM load program.

Loading a Binary Tape
Industrial

All

14 System paper tape software contains the

The

self-starting

Binary Loader program at

self-starting

Binary Loader, however, can only be loaded

into

its

beginning.

PDP-8/E, 8/F and 8/M computers. The regular Binary

Loader Program (DEC-08-LBAA-LM) must be loaded into
the PDP-8/1 or 8/L computers.

Procedure for loading the regular Binary Loader

Loader

Binary

the

Place

(DEC-08-LBAA-LM)

paper

tape

the paper tape reader

and turn the reader ON

The

the

correctly,

Set the Switch Register to 7756 and press the

LOAD ADDR and START switches on the

address where the

instructions are to be stored. The numbers that follow are

computer console.

instructions to be deposited in the PDP-8 memory.
3.

When the instructions are loaded, validate that the program

The paper tape containing the loader will then
be read.

was loaded correctly by examining the stored instructions.

When the EXAM switch is pressed, the lamps of the
memory buffer console display light, indicating the stored
instruction.
table,

When

the tape has been

read,

turn off the

reader and remove the tape.

The light patterns correspond to the following

Now any system program can be stored in PDP-8/1 or 8/L

the instructions have been correctly loaded.

memory.
Switch Register Setting

Operation Switch

7756

LOAD ADD

PDP-8/L

used for programming, the

MEM PROT

switch on the PDP-8/L console should be moved to the UP

Operation Switch

Memory Buffer Display
Low Speed
High Speed

position

once the

loader

memory. This prevents

unwanted destruction of the loader program. This switch is
not available on the PDP-8/1 computer.

EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM
EXAM

6032

6014

6031

6011

Procedure for loading a system software paper tape into ttie

5357

PDP-8/L or 8/1 memory

6036
7106
7006
7510
5357
7006

6016
7106
7006
7510
5374
7006
6011

6031

5367

6034
7420

3776
3376
5356

Place the system tape in the paper tape reader

and turn the reader ON. The tape must be
positioned with the leader/trailer code between

the

Binary

Loader and

the

Binary

System

Program over the reading head (Figure 8-6).

5367
6016
7420
3776
3376
5356

Set the PDP-8/L or 8/1 Switch Register to 7777

and press the

LOAD ADDR

switch

on the

computer console.
3.

the high-speed reader is being used, set SR

= 0.

8-3

the

Press

START

PDP-8 EDITOR

on the computer

switch

Industrial

console.

BOOL-143 and PAL-143 must

users

prepare a tape record of their program. This paper tape is
5.

procedure has been followed correctly,

this

referred to as a

the tape is read into memory.

When the tape reaches the
or 8/L console

machine language or binary tape used by the
14. Machine language is the form in which

Composing Source Programs
The PDP-8 Editor program can be used to compose
programs in the BOOL-143 and PAL-143 source language.

lamp remains lit, a

checksum error has occurred.

BINARY
LOADER

the

LINK display)

(not

remains lit, a reading error has occurred and the
tape must be reread.

into

Industrial 14 programs are debugged with ODP-143.

any lamp of the accumulator display on the
PDP-8/1

tape.

Industrial

end, it will stop. If

program source tape or source language

BOOL-143 and PAL-143 translate the source tape

The Editor enables the Industrial 14 user to type the
program on the Teletype keyboard and to correct typing
errors as they occur. Sections of the program can be moved

BINARY
SYSTEM
PROGRAM

LOAD POINT

by typing

deleted

Editor

single

commands. Program

source tapes are generated by the Editor and are used as
input to BOOL-143 or PAL-143.

:p'j;:il;;'j::i:il'-

''m

:mi:z;:

Updating Source Programs

A second, and important function of the Editor

updating

user programs. During the life of an Industrial 14 program,

many changes will be made to the original version. Errors
Figure 8-6

Paper Tape Load Point

uncovered with ODP-143, changes in machine function, and

new

additions of

inputs or outputs to the machine

all

require changes to the Industrial 14 program. These changes

Procedure for loading self-starting binary tapes

can be made with ODP-143; however, no permanent record
1

of the altered

and turn the reader ON.

correct the source tape of his program by reading it back

changes

and

corrections to the source program, and generating a

new

into
2.

program will exist. The user should always

Place an Industrial 14 System tape in the reader

Set

Instruction

Field and

Data Field on the

the

making

Editor,

the

necessary

program listing and tape.

PDP-8/E, 8/F or 8/IVI console to the field where
the RIM loader was deposited.

Text Buffer
3.

the

Set

Switch

A buffer is a computer storage area. The text buffer stores

on the computer

console to 7756 and press the

LOAD ADDR

the text of

switch on the PDP-8/E, 8/F, or 8/M console.

14 programs typed by the user,

Industrial

A text line is a collection of

organized by lines of text.

typed characters up to and including the carriage return at
4.

the high-speed reader is being used, set SR

the end

= 0.

the

The

line.

decimal-numbered;

each

lines

line

of the text

referenced

buffer are

its

line

number. By referring to specific line numbers, the Editor
5.

Press

the

START

switch

on the computer

commands can be used to change, list, and delete lines of

console and the Industrial 14 System tape will

text, and to insert lines of text before a specified line.

read in.

Modes of Operation
6.

Because the Editor accepts both commands and text from

When the Industrial 14 System tape has been
read

in,

the

system

program

will

the

self-start,

Teletype keyboard,

must recognize whether the

characters currently being typed are program text, being

activating the printer.

created or modified by the user, or
7.

8/M accumulator

(lamps

lit

Industrial

for

checksum

commands, directing

the Editor to perform text functions. The Editor makes this

there is no response, check the PDP-8/E, 8/F

distinction

error

by dividing

Command mode,

the accumulator) and reload the

all

its

keyboard are interpreted

14 System program.

8-4

operation into two modes. In

characters typed
as

on the Teletype

commands to the Editor to

perform some operation on the content of the text buffer,

Example 1

or to allow the user to operate on the text. In Text mode,
all

Character removed by each RUBOUT

characters typed on the keyboard are entered Into the

text buffer. Text can replace, be inserted into, or be added

to the current content of the text buffer.

1050 5 23* 17\\1017 * (43+1050)

The current mode of the Editor must always be noted. If a

command is typed while the Editor is in Text mode, it will
not be recognized as a command by the Editor and will be

2 RUBOUTS

2 characters

entered into the text buffer. Likewise, if text is typed while
the Editor

Example 2

Command mode, it will be treated as a

command.
Character removed by each RUBOUT
Transition Between Modes
The Editor enters the Command mode when

first

loaded and is ready to accept the first command from the
user.

Only legal commands are accepted; any other typed

START, TN LSI \\\\\ F SOLA

7^ \

characters cause the Editor to type a question mark (?) and

command to be typed. Some commands

wait for a legal

cause the Editor to enter Text mode. In Text mode,

all

characters typed are entered

from Text mode, press the

CTRL key of the Teletype

keyboard while striking the

FORM key (CTRL/FORM).

the text buffer.

and one space

To exit
In

the above examples, the user enters Text nrxjde with the

A command and begins typing a BOOL-143/8 program

The Editor responds by ringing the Teletype bell and waits
for a new command (Figure 8-7).

(Example
error

PAL-143/8 program (Example

2).

all

by repeatedly

striking

characters back

to the

RUBOUT key,

the
*

the

BOOL-143

program and back to the T in the PAL-14 program. The

TYPE A COMMAND THEN
PRESS RETURN KEY.

correct characters are then typed and the line is terminated

by typing

RETURN. The correct versions of the above

examples are as follows:

c TEXT MODE 3

or a

made, however, and the user deletes the incorrect

information
erasing

^co UMAND MODE)

5 RUBOUTS

4 characters

1050 = 23* 1017(43+ 1050)^

TYPE DESIRED PROGRAM
TEXT, THEN PRESS THE

CTRL/FORM KEYS.

START, TF SOLA ^
Figure 8-7

Transitions Between Editor

The backarrow (*-)

Modes

also used to erase typed characters

from the text buffer. It is typed by holding the SHIFT key

down and striking the letter O key. This special character
Adding Text to the Buffer

deletes the complete line of characters

To compose Industrial 14 programs with the Editor, type
A. The A command instructs the Editor to enter Text mode

margin and itself. The following example illustrates the use

between the left

of the backarrow:

and to add all of the text typed on the keyboard to the text
buffer.

The new

text

added

at the

1005 = 2+7(16* 1003)

end of any text

currently in the buffer.

THE FOLLOWING
EQUATION CONTROLS
SOLENOID A.^

Editing Keys

Typing errors can be erased with the RUBOUT key. This
key deletes (to the left) one character, or space, each time

In the

it is struck. The RUBOUT key can delete characters in only
one line of text. The Editor types a backslash (\) each time

the

RUBOUT

key

illustrate the use of the

struck.

above example, a complete line of text is deleted,

using the backarrow, and a comment is inserted in its place.

The line of the text buffer reads as follows:

;THE FOLLOWING EQUATION CONTROLS

The following examples

RUBOUT key.

;SOLENOID A.

8-5

Editor remains in Text mode and accepts all characters and

Reading a Paper Tape
Source tapes, previously generated by the Editor, can be
read into the text buffer for modification or addition by

are inserted in the text buffer, type CTRL/FORM to return

using the command:

the Editor to Command mode.

The Editor "pushes down" text in the buffer when the
command is used. The new text is automatically numbered,

The R command

thereby changing the previously assigned line numbers.

(read) causes the paper tape to be read

Thus, if one line is inserted before line 15 (151

from the low-speed reader into the text buffer. If the buffer
is not empty, the information will be added at the end of
the previously stored text. After the

tape

R is typed and the

read, the Editor rings the Teletype bell and enters

Deleting Lines from the Text Buffer
Industrial

The R command reads a paper tape from the high-speed

lines

reader when the last switch of the Switch Register (SR 11)
set

J ), line 15

becomes line 16 and the newly typed line becomes line 15.

Command mode.

by the user into the text buffer. When all lines

lines typed

14 programs can also be modified by deleting

with the

D command. The D command

typed,

preceded by the line or lines to be deleted. For example,

ON. Otherwise, the tape is read from the low-speed

the command

reader of the Teletype.

1,15D^
Listing a Program

Once the program has been typed or read from a tape, the
complete text can

be typed

issuing

removes the

the following

immediately

command.

first

lines

becomes line

the text buffer. Line 16

and all other line numbers are

adjusted accordingly. After executing the D command, the
Editor returns to Command mode.

When a line has been deleted, the remaining line numbers
are adjusted immediately. For example, the two commands

The complete content of the text buffer is typed on the
Teletype printer.

listed

below actually delete lines 16 and 17 of the original

text buffer:

The L command can be modified to type only certain lines
by

specifying

limits

for

the

list.

The

limits

are typed

16D^
16D^

preceding the L, separated by a comma. For example:

1 ,

5L ^

List the content of text buffer lines
1

12L^

The complete buffer is deleted by the K (kill) command.
This command can be used after punching one program and

through 15 inclusive.

List line 12 of the text buffer.

before reading another program tape.

Remember that the lines of the text buffer are decimal
numbered, starting with line 1. After the Editor has typed
Changing Lines of Text

the text, it enters Command mode.

The C (change) command is a combination of the D and

Industrial

of lines, by text typed on the keyboard. For example, the

14 programs can be modified with the Editor by

command

command. This
inserting new
number of the
decimal
the
preceded
by
command is typed,
lines of text,

commands and enables the user to replace a line, or a group

Inserting a New Line of Text

using the

15, 17C

line before which the new text will be placed. For example,

the command
deletes lines 15 through 17 and then causes the Editor to

151

enter Text

mode. The text typed by the user

then

inserted as lines 15, 16, 17, 18, etc. The user can type as

allows one or more new lines of text to be typed before line

many lines as needed. When the new text has been typed,

15 of the current text buffer.

strike

8-6

CTRL/FORM to return to Command mode.

The C command can be used to replace one line with many
or

lines,

many

lines

with

required between the total

only one; no equivalence

Delete the entire line to the left of the search

character using the backarrow (<-).

number of lines deleted and the

total number of lines added in their place.

Delete the entire line to the right of the search

character using the RETURN key.

NOTE
Line numbers are automatically adjusted for

new

the

text

CTRL/FORM

when
key

the

user

return

presses

Delete one character (moving from right to left)

the

for each

RUBOUT typed.

Insert

CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED,

Command

mode.

thereby dividing the line into two lines.

Moving Lines of Program Text
Occasionally, Industrial

Press

14 programs must be completely

CTRL/FORM

for

the

occurrence of the search character.

reorganized, for instance, to better fit the page structure of
the

Industrial

accomplished

This

14.

with

the

reorganization

(move)

can

easily

command. The

For example, consider the following equation:

command has a special command format that specifies the
line,

101 1 = 21 * 35 * 1010 • (131 + 21 + 44)

or group of lines, to be moved and the line number on

which the moved

lines will

Assume that 131 should be 1031.

be placed. For example, the

command
In

15,27$30M'^

the example, the

character.

number can be selected as the search

However,

since

there are

occurrences of

six

number 1 prior to the one to be altered, the CTRL/FORM
moves lines 15 through 27 before line 30. The line numbers
are

automatically

adjusted

and the Editor returns to

Command mode. In the example, line 30 remains line 30;
line 28

keys must be used to bypass the six preceding number

Is.

Once the seventh

are

inserted.

becomes line 15; line 29 becomes line 16; and lines

the

end

15 through 27 become lines 17 through 29.

retyping the

line.

The M command can move one or more lines before the

deleted.

line

and

The CTRL/FORM keys are used to continue the

until

letter

reached, the numbers

the

line,

thereby

completely

RETURN key was used after the

was changed, the remainder of the

line

would be

number that is preceded by a $ in the command. The

Editor automatically returns to Command mode after an

command is executed.
Search Feature

RUBOUT

The search feature is a helpful feature, available with the
Editor,

which enables the user to modify a line of text

without completely retyping the line. The line number of
the

line

be searched

1011 =21 *35* 1010* (1/1031 + 21 +44)

typed, followed by S and a

carriage return. The user then types the "search character".

This character can be any keyboard character

lit

letter,

number or symbol). The search character is not printed on
the teleprinter

CTRL/FORM

when the key is struck. Instead, the Editor

begins typing the searched line up to, and including, the
first occurence of the designated search character.

When the

Editor locates and types the search character, typing stops

The

and any combination of the following operations can be
typed by the user:

editing task when the search feature is used. For example, if

To change the entire line to the right of the
search character, enter new text and terminate

CTRL/FORM is required to get to the second 3. Two
RUBOUTS are then typed, thereby removing the 3 and 1.
After 103 is typed, CTRL/FORM is used to repeat the

the line with the RETURN key.

remainder of the line.

the

8-7

intelligent choice of a search character

number 3

selected

can ease the

the search character,

one

Special Characters

Press LSP OFF.

Type F and

In most cases, use of the Editor commands requires the user

to type line numbers. These line numbers are computed by

counting the number of preceding

lines,

or the following

special character

Has a value equal to the line number
of the last edited line. Thus after a line

Turn LSP OFF.

edited, it can be listed by typing .L

Type T and

typed to

signal the end of

RETURN keys. Turn LSP ON.

Leader/trailer tape will be generated.

and a carriage return.

Has a value equal to the line number
of the last line in the buffer. Thus, /D

/(slash)

the tape for the Editor.

special characters can be used:

.(period)

RETURN keys. Turn LSP ON. A

10-

Turn LSP OFF and remove the source tape.

means delete the last line.
+, -(plus, minus)

Used with the

The following procedure generates a source tape using the
high-speed punch (HSP).

characters

represent line numbers. For example,

.+5L means list the fifth line after the

Used with the

next-to-last

the

switch

the

Switch

last edited line.

= (equals)

Set

or / characters to find

Turn HSP ON.

Type T and RETURN keys.

the value of these characters. When the

types

user

decimal

.=,

the

number

Editor types the

of the current line.

types the decimal value of the last line

Type the Punch command P^, nP^
m,nP J (where m and n are decimal

in the buffer.

numbers).

When

the user types /=, the Editor

Punching a Source Tape

text will

When the Industrial 14 program has been prepared with the
Editor, a paper tape is punched with the P command. This

command
(P ?)

)

can be used to punch the complete program

or a group of lines within the program (15,30P^

Type

T and

quickly

press

LSP

or
line

PDP-8 CONT switch. The program

now be punched.

Type F and RETURN keys.

Type T and RETURN keys.

Remove the generated source tape.

The following procedure generates a source tape using the
low-speed punch (LSP) on the Teletype:
1.

Press the

A program can be segmented and punched in sections using

ON. The

the

leader/trailer tape will be punched.

.EOT (BOOL-143/8) or EOT (PAL-143/8)

control

statements to conclude all but the final segment. Thus, the
2.

foregoing procedures can be used to punch all, or part of,

Press LSP OFF.

Type

the

Punch

m,nP'i (where

command
and

are

P^,

nP^,

decimal

an Industrial 14 program. This enables the user to edit and
generate tape for programs that are not small enough to fit

completely within the text buffer.

line

numbers).

Editor Summary Tables

Turn LSP ON.
Press the

Tables 8-1 and 8-2 summarize the characters and symbols
used with the Editor. Note that the characters have

CONT switch, located on the PDP-8

different meanings when used in Command or Text mode.

console. The program will now be punched.

8-8

Table 8-1
Special Editor Keys

Key

Command iVIode

RETURN

Text Mode

Execute preceding command

Enter line in text buffer

Cancel preceding command (Editor responds
with a ? followed by a carriage return and

Cancel line to the left margin

line feed)

RUBOUT

Same as <-

Delete to the left one character for each
depression, a backslash (\) is echoed (not

used in Read (R) command)

CTRL/FORM

Respond with question mark and remain
in

Command mode

Return to Command mode and ring
teleprinter bell

Value equal to decimal value of current
line (used alone or with + or -

Legal text character

and a

number, e.g., +8)
Value equal to number of last line in

Legal text character

buffer; used as an argument

LINE FEED

List next line

Used in Search (S) command to insert

CR/LF into line

List next line

List previous line

Used with = or / to obtain their value

Same as = (gives value of legitimate
argument)

CTRL/TAB

Produces a tab which on output is
interpreted as 8 spaces or a tab/rubout,
depending on SR option

Loading The Editor

The

Editor

supplied

binary

paper

The paper tape input and output are controlled by the last
two switches of the Switch Register. If the high-speed

tape

(DEC-08-ESAB-PB) and is loaded with the Binary loader
program. It operates in any field of a PDP-8.

reader/punch is used, these switches should be set ON. If
the low-speed reader/punch of the Teletype is used, these
switches should remain OFF.

Starting the Editor

When the Editor has been loaded and no checksum error
has occurred, the PDP-8 Switch Register is set to 200 and
the Instruction Field

set equal to the Data Field if an 8K

NOTE

PDP-8 is used. The LOAD ADDR and START switches are

Further information on the Editor, including
features not described
in
this manual, is

then pressed,

in that order. The Editor prints a carriage
return and waits for a typed command from the user. All

available in the

further operation is controlled by commands.

DEC publication Introduction

to Programming (Pages 5-11 through 5-42).

8-9

Table 8-2

Summary of Editor Commands
Function

Type

Command

Input

Append incoming text from keyboard into text buffer

Append incoming text from tape reader into text buffer

List entire text buffer

List line n

m,nL

List lines

Change line n

m,nC

Change lines m through n inclusively

Insert before first line

Insert before line n

Delete line n

m,nD

Delete lines

m,n$klVI

Move lines m through n to before line k

Search buffer for character specified after RETURN
key and allow modification (search character is not

Editing

m through n inclusively

echoed on printer)

Output

Search line n, as above

m,nS

Search lines m through n inclusively, as above

Punch entire text buffer

Punch line n

m,nP

Punch lines m through n inclusively

Punch about 6 inches of leader/trailer tape

Punch a FORM FEED onto tape

m and n are decimal numbers; m is smaller than n; k

a decimal number.

The P command halts the Editor to enable the programmer to select I/O control; press
CONT to execute these commands.

Commands are executed when the RETURN key is depressed, excluding the P and N
commands.

8-10

SET-143/8 OPERATIONS

SET-143 stops processing on an .END or .ENDN statement
and punches the

trailer tape.

this time, a

complete,

Loading and Starting SET-143

alphabetized, symbol-assignment listing

SET-143 is supplied as a self-starting binary paper tape and

user has answered the query SYM-Y, N? with a Y (yes).

loaded into Field

generated if the

of the PDP-8 with the RIM loader. To

load the tape, use either the paper tape reader on the 33

ASR Teletype or the high-speed reader.
If

Using SET-143

Because SET-143 generates a symbolic tape, both the
output tape and the input tape can be edited with the

the high-speed reader is to be used for input, the source

program paper tape should be loaded

reader

described

before

answering

the

queries

PDP-8 Editor. Program mistakes in BOOL-143 and
ODP-143 can be corrected by using the Editor to change
the input to SET-143 or to change the output from
SET-143 (which is the input) to BOOL-143. When the
SET-143 input tape is edited, only the symbolic equation

the high-speed
in

the

following:

When started, SET-143 responds by typing three queries:

and/or symbol table must be changed. When the output

*IN-LH?

What device will be used to supply the
source

tape?

Will

tape

is edited, the symbolic equation and/or symbol table
and the control equations must be changed.

be the low-speed

paper tape reader (L) or the high-speed
paper tape reader (H)?

SET-143

also

facilitates

major changes to the input or

output terminals, which are wired to machine inputs and

*OUT-LH?

What device will be used to punch the

outputs.

output tape? Will

translated to incorporate the new I/O numbers.

punch

(L), the high

be the low-speed

The symbol table can be modified and the tape

speed-punch (H), or

will there be no punched output (N)?

SET-143

also

approaches

*SYM-Y, N?

Does the user want both the symbol table

allows the user to store proven control

untranslated

The control

form.

standard units or processes can be recorded

for

a SET-143

and the sorted symbol table output, yes

input format of symbolic equations.

(Y),orno(N)?

application arises for the unit or process (as part of a larger

When a particular

system, for example), the symbols may be assigned an input

When the third query has been answered, SET-143 types

and

the message:

BOOL-143 can be generated.

output designation, and the control equations for

TURN ON PUNCH
BOOL-143/8 OPERATIONS
and

halts.

Always validate that the input tape is loaded in

the proper reader, and turn on the proper punch according
to the query responses (L or H).

switch

pressed,

BOOL-143/8 Options

When the PDP-8 CONT

SET-143 punches the

Options available to the user are requested through a series

leader tape and

of four queries which are typed to start the BOOL-143/8

begins the translation.

compilation process.

If the

user types a response other than

a legal response to a query,
If the

low-speed output is used, a copy of the output tape is

BOOL-143/8 will retype the

query.

typed as the tape is being punched. Any error messages are
typed and punched in the format of BOOL-143 comments.

At the end of each symbol table input, the number of
errors detected

output

also

Example:

typed as a comment. If high-speed

used, no record

typed during translation. A

*SRC-LH? N ^

record can be listed off-line on the Teletype at any time.

N is not a legal response to the

SRC query,

The only message typed on the Teletype is the number of

*SRC-LH?

BOOL-143/8 will retype the query.

errors detected after the symbol table input.
If

SET-143 halts on each .EOT statement to allow

the user types more than one character in response to a

new
input tape to be loaded. Pressing CONT causes SET- 1 43 to

typed before the carriage return. Therefore,

continue with the translation process, ignoring

response

all

query,

blank

tape (leader and trailer).

BOOL-143/8
is

recognizes

only

the

typed, the user can correct

correct character, prior to the carriage return.

8-11

last
if

character
a

wrong

by typing the

Binary Output

program which contain

The binary paper tape output from BOOL-143/8, which is
input to ODP-143/8, or to the VT14 Programming

might type:

1010= 27 (1003-1-21) * 4

Terminal, is requested in response to the query:

For example, BOOL-143/8

errors.

Note that an operator is
missing after 27.

E011

*BIN-NLH?
N, L, and

H are the possible user-supplied responses and

The

could then correct this and any other error

user

have the following meanings:

compilation

during

detected

and

generate an

updated,

program tape with the Editor. When all
errors have been corrected, the program is recompiled with

correct source

No binary output is wanted.

BOOL-143/8 and
L

The binary paper tape

requested

on the

complete compiler

listing

should be

requested.

low-speed paper tape punch associated with the

The

Teletype unit.

The binary paper tape

requested

on the

response

BOOL-143/8

causes

generate

the

complete compiler listing on the low-speed teleprinter. All
lines of the source program are typed (followed by an error

number if the line contains an error). If there is no error,

high-speed paper tape punch.

the generated Industrial 14 machine code instructions are

The user types one of the three possible responses, followed
by a carriage return. For example, the user may not want a
binary tape if he expects errors in his program. By typing
N, he can compile the program and obtain an error listing

without wasting time generating an incomplete binary tape.
The other two possible responses request the binary output

listed below the equation.

The H response causes BOOL-143/8 to generate a listing on
the high-speed punch. This allows off-line generation of
several

Teletype

listings.

the

listing

generated on the

high-speed punch, errors are also typed on the Teletype.

and specify the device to be used.
Compiler Listing

The compiler

The compiler listing contains error messages and generated

machine code instructions following each equation. These

machine code instructions for solving the equations of the
source program. The compiler listing is output according to

instructions are typed in four columns: the first column

the following query:

contains the Industrial 14 generated

column is the numeric form of the
and the third and fourth columns are the

stored, the second

instruction

symbolic form of the instruction. For example:

where N, L, and H have the following meanings:

listing

output

requested;

BOOL-143/8

types only the lines which contain errors and

•

LUC

the applicable error number.

loni = !-(.( 3W+3+101P)
L

complete listing of source statements,
compiled machine code instructions and error

The

messages is typed on the Teletype.

The

complete

listing

punched

the

high-speed paper tape punch. Errors are typed

on the Teletype.

IF
JFh

0'^')00

/ifi'.i I

CT^'^1

'?'?i'?.i

«(1:1P
-•,,•1 o
f.

403P Tf
a'M^2

'7)f10/t

Pi'V.:i7

O'/l'/i'i

sni p

i) 11

?i -^ .?

JFF
IF

;vi;'i0

101 P
^'^l 1

The user types one of the three responses, followed by a

?/4l 1
T 1 1

JF.Ni

(7ic;ii^7

S.M

100 1

only an error listing is wanted, the user

i^<7i\'^

(^fllfl

.S.KP

nr'H 1

i) <='

carriage return.

types N.

the octal absolute address in memory where the instruction
is

*LST-NLH?

listing

BOOL-143/8 types only those lines of the source

8-12

':i

m 3=P* +
''J

i"!

3 * ( / /i + / S )

monitor transition commands (.MN, .MF, and .MFN), and
certain control statements (.FIXS and .VARS).

1-1

'-1

;i p)

1
1

7i 1

ofinp

H9,'A9

Yi'

Ix 'A r\ ii

Pi'1P3

J>-f

00 A
93

Loading and Starting BOOL-143/8
BOOL-143/8 is supplied as a self-starting binary tape and is

50 3 Tf

10 13

loaded into Field

of the

PDP-8 memory with the RIM

c^ :^ 1

P4P5

Jf^i

OOPS

loader.

paper

tape

00 17

f^r^iAii

T^J

;i0?':^

P'3P3 JFF
60f^5 TiM
P/)P5 JFN

'7!

p!':iPl

C-?!lPP

30P3 30 3
30P4 '?^1 T

reader

on the 33

ASR

tape.

OOPS

1013

the high-speed reader is to be used, the source program

paper tape should be loaded in the high-speed reader before

SKI-

the queries are answered.

1013 Sf

the

Teletype or the high-speed reader can be used to load the

0P3
00 OS

Si^J

?] .:i

Either

10 13

When started, BOOL-143/8 responds by typing a sequence
of queries, for example:

At the end of the program listing, BOOL-143/8 types the
following messages:

*SRC-LH?

ERROR LINES:

What is the source device from which the

program

The decimal number of lines in
source

the

program

reader

contained errors.

will

BOOL-143/8?

which

Will

the

supplied

be the low-speed

Teletype

(L),

the

high-speed paper tape reader (H)?

PROGRAM BREAK:

The highest absolute
14

Industrial

*BIN-NLH?

memory address used by the

What device is to be used for the binary
output

compiled program.

tape?

requested

(N);

Source Program

low-speed

paper

The source program can be supplied to BOOL-143/8 from

binary output

one of two devices: the low-speed paper tape reader or the

tape punch (H)?

high-speed paper tape reader,

the PDP-8 System

no binary output

tape

output on

the

punch

(L);

on the high-speed paper

equipped. The source is specified in response to the query:

*LST-NLH?

What listing form is required? No listing is
required

*SRC-LH?

(N).

listing

where the L and H have the following meanings:

this

case,

only error

A low (L) speed
is
requested. A high (H) speed

messages are

typed.

punched tape listing is requested.

The source program is in paper tape form and is
to be read with

binary

*VT14-NY?

the low-speed reader of the

VT14 compatability requested, (N) No

or (Y) Yes?

Teletype unit.

The source program is in paper tape form and is

When the VT14-NY? query has been answered, compilation

to be read with the high-speed reader.

begins.

the low-speed reader

used to read a source

paper tape, the reader must be switched to START before

VT14 Compatability
The
VT14 compatability

compilation begins.
option

query

was

enables

BOOL-143/8 to detect BOOL commands whose machine
language cannot be executed

the

not

loaded

the high-speed reader is used, and

prior

answering

the

final

query,

BOOL-143/8 must be stopped and restarted at 200, after

VT14 programming

the tape to be translated is loaded into the reader.

terminal. The query is:

As BOOL-143/8 reads and compiles the source tape, it
listing and a binary tape. If the listing and the

VT14-NY?

outputs a

binary output devices are the same, the binary output tape

where the possible responses N and Y specify No and Yes
respectively.

With

the

VT14

compatability

will

be created first. As soon as the binary tape is punched,

press the PDP-8

option,

BOOL-143/8 will detect all R- and Z-function commands.

CONT switch to start the listing, with the

first source tape in the reader.

8-13

BOOL-143/8 normally completes the compilation
reading

paper

source

the

tape

once.

However,

RETURN The particular output is not wanted; the
RETURN key is typed, without being

after
if

the

preceded by either an L or H.

program has been segmented with the .EOT statement,
BOOL-143/8 halts after the incomplete tape and types

the PDP-8 system

not equipped with a high-speed

EOT. The next tape should then be loaded and the PDP-8

CONT switch pressed.

reader/punch unit and all outputs are wanted, the responses

to all questions will be L and the query sequence will be:

When compilation begins BOOL 143/8 types the message
is

to be punched. The

*BIN-L

proper punch should then be turned

ON and the PDP-8

*LST-L

switch depressed. The binary output tape will then

*SRC-L

TURN PUNCH ON,
CONT

a binary tape

be punched.

To generate an error listing only,
If

more than one source tape

to be assembled, the user

request no binary, no

listing, and specify only the source device.

can simply press the PDP-8 CONT switch after the binary

no second pass is needed for a
BOOL-143/8 then begins the option queries by

paper tape
listing,

punched.

a mistake

made while typing a response to a query, the

user may change the response before typing the terminating
carriage return, simply by typing the correct response. Only

typing *SRC-LH?.

the last character is recognized. For example:
Figure 8-8 is a flow chart for BOOL-143/8 operation.

*BIN-LH
'LST-HL

PAL-143/8 OPERATIONS
is the

Loading and Starting PAL-143/8

PAL-143/8
loaded

into

supplied as a self-starting binary tape and

the

same as typing:

*B1N-H
*LST-L

PDP-8 memory with the RIM loader

program. Either the paper tape reader on the Teletype or
the high-speed reader can be used to load the tape.

the high-speed reader is to be used, the source program
paper tape should be loaded in the high-speed reader before
If

The user can erase all previous query responses and restart
the sequence of queries by typing the response X. For
example:

the queries are answered. When started, PAL-143/8 types

'BIN-L

the following queries to determine the devices to be used

*LST-X

during assembly.

The query sequence has been restarted.

*BIN-

*BIN

Type the

letter

signifying the device

which the binary tape will be punched. The
binary tape is the assembly output.

Two additional responses (N and E) are used to control the
output or optional error listings. These character responses
be typed, along with the required response to any

can

*LST

Type the

letter

signifying the

device on

which the assembly listing will be typed (or

query. They can be erased by typing the

X response and

restarting the query sequence.

punched).

*SRC

Type the

letter

signifying

separate

error

listing

desired

on the

Teletype. PAL-143/8 suppresses the output of

the device on

which the program source tape will be read.

the Pass

high-speed

error listing to the Teletype.

punch

used

output

the

assembly listing, the output of the Pass 2 error

The responses are:

listing to the Teletype is also suppressed.

The low-speed Teletype unit is to be used as
E

the device.

the high-speed punch

used to output the

assembly listing, typing E requests that the Pass

The high-speed paper tape reader/punch is to

error listing be

punch also.

be used as the device.

8-14

punched on the high-speed

START

[

]

•r

LOAD BOOL 143/8
INTO POP -8

COMPUTER
HALTS UPON
COMPLETION

/bool 143/8Ns^^NO

PRI MTt;

SRC-LH

PLACE NEXT
TAPE IN
READER

YES

PLACE SOURCE
TAPE

READER

ANSWER ALL
QUERIES

BOOL 143/8
PRINTS "TURN
PUNCH ON" AND

COMPUTER
HALTS
TURN PUNCH ON

TURN PUNCH ON

PLACE SOURCE

TURN READER ON

TAPE IN READER

PRESS COUNT"
ON PDP-8

PRESS "COUNT"
ON PDP-8

SOURCE TAPE
READS IN AND
LISTING IS
PRINTED

YES

ERROR MESSAGE
PRINTED
(IF APPLICABLE)
YES

COMPUTER HALTS

SOURCE TAPE
READS IN AND
BINARY TAPE
IS

PUNCHED

SOURCE TAPE
READS IN AND
LISTING AND
BINARY TAPE
ARE OUTPUT

Figure 8-8

BOOL- 143/8 Operational Flow Chart

8-15

For

example,

the

sequence of

following

and

queries

responses results in binary output on the high-speed punch:

If a PAL-143/8 source program is contained on two or
more source tapes, the assembler stops after reading all but

the last source tape and types the following message:

The

assembly

listing

punched

the

*EOT(endof tape)

high-speed punch

The source tape

read from the high-speed

reader

Whenever this message is typed, the user should load the
next sequential tape and press the PDP-8 CONT switch.

(No Pass 1 or Pass 2 error listings are typed on

Error Halt

the Teletype)

Symbol table overflow is the only error which will halt the
assembly. If this occurs, PAL-143/8 types the following

The

Pass

error

listing

message:

punched on the

high-speed punch.

*SMB OFLW
*BIN-HN )
*LST-HE }
*SRC-H >

Recovery is possible only if the user segments the program
and reassembles it, in parts.

ODP-143 OPERATIONS
ODP-143/8 is supplied as a self-starting binary tape and is
of an 8K PDP-8 memory with the
loaded into Field
toggled-in RIM loader. Either the paper tape reader on the

Assembly Passes

PAL-143/8 must read the program source tape possibly two

on the selection of assembly
devices. The first pass of PAL-143/8 defines symbols and

or three times, depending

checks for errors. The second pass types the listing and the

model 33 ASR Teletype or a high-speed reader can be used

separate devices are designated for the

to load the tape. Before loading and starting ODP-143/8,

symbol

table.

installation of the Industrial

and the binary output, the binary output will also be

listing

punched on the second

pass.

the same device

14 and the PDP-8 to Industrial

14 serial interface must be completed. If this is not done,

(for

ODP-143/8 will print "INDUSTRIAL 14 HUNG".

instance, the Teletype) is used for the listing and the binary

output, a third pass will be required to punch the binary

To restart ODP-143/8, set the Switch Register to 0200, and
press the START switch (es) on the PDP-8 console. Upon
starting or restarting, ODP-143/8 will enter Program mode

tape and thereby complete the assembly process.

PAL-143/8 types the message:

and place the Industrial 14 into External mode.

*PAS

USING OS/8 SYSTEM TO DEVELOP INDUSTRIAL 14
and halts when

has completed an assembly pass.

PROGRAMS

BOOL-143/8, SET-143/8, PAL-143/8 and ODP-143/8 can
used with the powerful OS/8 system to develop

further pass is required, the user reloads the paper tape in

the reader and

CONT switch. If the

presses the PDP-8

low-speed reader is used as the SRC device, the reader must

START before

Industrial

programs

efficiently.

This

section

Before

describes briefly, the loading, accessing, and operation of

beginning the pass which punches the binary tape output

PAL-143/OS8,
and
SET-143/OS8,
BOOL-143/OS8,
that
the
user
has
assumed
a
It
is
ODP-143/OS8 programs.
If
not,
before
system.
of
the
OS/8
thorough knowledge
continuing, it is recommended that the user read the "OS/8
User's Guide", (DEC S8-0SRMA-A-D).

be switched to

(either

Pass 2 or Pass 3) the

the pass will start.

punch designed

the BIN

query must be turned ON.

More than one program can be assembled without reloading

PAL-143/8 by pressing CONT

response to the

*PAS

Saving 143/OS8 Programs

BOOL-143/OS8, SET-143/OS8, PAL-143/OS8 and
ODP-143/OS8 Programs are supplied on paper tape. These
143/OS8 programs should be loaded into core and then
stored in Save Format on the system DECtape or disk unit

statement, typed after the binary output has been punched.

PAL-143/8 responds by typing the
*LST, and

*SCR)

and

the

initial

assembly

The

queries (*BIN,

process

may

restarted.

8-16

with the Keyboard Monitor before running them. When

OS/8 Command Decoder expects the
SET-143/OS8and ODP-143/OS8 to be:

program on the system device, core limits
(locations in memory), starting address, and the job status

Saving each

word must be specified. Table 8-3 lists core limits (locations
in memory), the starting address, and job status word for

file

each 143/OS8 program.

input

string

for

.BN<file. BN

Where the Input and output files are both binary format.

For example, to Save a paper tape of BOOL-143/OS8 on

To read the input file, type R ^ To punch the output file,

the system device type:

type P ^.

.SAVE SYS 0S8B0L 2000-2777, 10000-16577;
102005 = 4002
143/OS8 Program Differences
The OS/8 Command Decoder eliminates all queries
BOOL-143/8, SET-143/8 and PAL-143/8 except:

To access and run the BOOL-143/OS8 Program, type:

.R 0S8B0L

VT14-NY? - for BOOL-143/8
The OS/8 System enters the Command Decoder and prints

and

an asterisk (*) when it is ready to accept a command string.

SYM-YN?- for SET-143/8

Command Decoder Input Strings
OS/8 Command Decoder expects the following input string

These queries are printed after the

Command Decoder

input string has been issued.

for BOOL-143/OS8and PAL-143/OS8:

file. BIN, file.

LS < file

Upon

SET-143/OS8's

BOOL-143/OS8's

translation,

compilation, or PAL-143/OS8's assembly of the Industrial

Where file .BIN is the binary (assembled or compiled)

14 source program, each program will exit automatically to

output files.

Keyboard Monitor (printing a tC). To exit from the
ODP-143/OS8 program to the Keyboard Monitor, or to halt

file

the

.LS is the output (assembled or compiled) listing.

any printing

(for a List or Interrogate command) the user

must press the CONTROL and C keys, simultaneously. To
file

.PA is the input source file.

restart the ODP-143 program, type

ST^

Table 8-3

143/OS8 Program Specifications
6 Character

Status

143/088 Programs

Filename

Core Limits

Starting Address

Word

BOOL-143/OS8
DEC14-IB0LB-A-PB

0S8B0L

2000 - 2777

10200

4002

SET-143/OS8

0S8SET
00200

2000

17000- 17577

00200

2000

0-5177

00200

2001

10000-16577

DEC14-ISETB-A-PB

PAL-143/OS8

0-3777

0S8PAL

DEC14-IPALB-A-PB

ODP-143/OS8
DEC14-I0DP-A-PB

0-5577

0S80DP

8-17

Table 8-4

143/OS8 I/O Errors
The I/O error messages, shown in Table 8-4, may appear
when reading, writing, opening or closing OS/8 files.

143/OS8 I/O Error Messages
Meaning

I/O Error Messages

one of these error messages occur:

Open Error

143/OS8 System cannot open an
output file.

Check the input and output device in use for
proper mode of operation.

Read Error

143/OS8 System cannot

read

input character.
b.

Validate

that

all

necessary

input or output

devices were issued to the Command Decoder.

Write Error

143/OS8 System cannot write an
output character.

Once this error message is printed, control returns to the
OS/8 Keyboard Monitor. To reenter the Command
Decoder, type "ST" (Start).

Close Error

143/OS8 System cannot close an
output file.

818

CHAPTER 9
MONITORING

Although

the

Industrial

system,

control

use

its

primarily

The output register holds data returning from the Industrial

stand-alone

conjunction with

computer

14 controller to the computer. This data word Is 12-bits in

offers an added dimension to a control system. This chapter

manner

the

details

which

the

Industrial

length

can

and

can

generated

either

internal-

externally-supplied instructions. Associated with the output

communicate with a computer.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter introduces the instructions which are executed
within the Industrial 14 to cause

to react to computer

input, and the instructions that cause it to send information

to the computer. Later sections of the chapter describe the

OUTPUT
REGISTER

available communication interfaces. The instructions which
are

executed within the monitoring computer to pass the

previously

mentioned

controller,

and receive data from the controller, are also

Industrial

14 instructions to the

COMPUTER

INDUSTRIAL 14

CONTROLLER
MEMORY

described.

^;;;i---_
^~~~~-

MEMORY

PORT

MONITORING FACILITIES

14-0348

The Industrial 14 has two primary facilities for computer
connection: a memory port and an output register (Figure

Figure 9-1

Industrial 14 Monitoring Facilities

9-1).

The memory port can be equated to an opening in memory

MONITORING APPROACHES

through which externally supplied instructions are passed.
In

actuality, the

Four general approaches to monitoring are available with

memory port is a three-word by 12-bit

the

control

logic

permitted to

for

The memory

execution.

interrupt the

internal

port

Status reporting

instruction
cleared.

status
is

(usually with

memory port. When a new
to the memory port, the flag is

the

supplied

its

current

externally-supplied
controller.

instruction

executes the

used

individually

achieved by placing instructions in the

this

time,

the

executed

executed;

this time,

next instruction of

its

BOOL-143) to recognize that a meaningful

change has occurred; an appropriate data word
loaded

into

then

the output register and transmitted to the

monitoring computer.

Polling allows the computer to read the status of controller

The external flag is set after the full one-, two-

three-word

controller

instruction;

memory which report changes in state of
outputs to the computer. The controller is programmed

The memory port then waits for the controller to

complete

can

controller's

Associated with the memory port is the external flag which
the

they

14;

program and supply

instructions on a cycle-stealing basis.

signals

Industrial

collectively to fulfill particular application requirements.

inputs and outputs at any time.

The computer supplies

instructions through the memory port which interrupt the

the

internal

Industrial

program.

14 and cause

to test the required points,

loading their status into the output register. A single point.

9-1

or a consecutive group of eight points, may be polled in a
single transfer.
register,

Once the controller has loaded the output

returns to

its

internal

program

until

again

INDUSTRIAL 14
CONTROLLER

polled.

COMPUTER

MEMORY

OUTPUT
.^» |register|

1^
COMPUTER

Nj
^

INDUSTRIAL 14
CONTROLLER

Computer Command

Figure 9-4

MEMORY

!^;^]^--~_
^~"~-^ MEMORY
PORT

Down line loading is used to supply a partial or a complete

14-0347

Figure 9-2

program to the controller. It is achieved by interrupting the
it into external mode, in which only

controller and locking

Status Reporting

externally-supplied instructions are accepted. After turning

the

controller's

controller's
port.

outputs

memory

Once loaded,

OFF, the computer
necessary,

memory

can

loads the

through the

content by supplying instructions to read back

^^^J OUTPUT ^^^

memory

content through the output register. The computer then

IV^^REGISTER^^^^ INDUSTRIAL 14

releases

CONTROLLER

the

controller

from

mode and

external

the

Industrial 14 begins execution of the new control program.

c5>

COMPUTER

memory

be verified for proper

MEMORY

k^^l
^^^^
^^^ MEMORY
PORT ^^^^
14-0348

Figure 9-3

Computer command

Polling

Industrial

OUTPUT
REGISTER
14 Controller

COMPUTER

achieved by interrupting the controller and supplying an
instruction through the

memory

INDUSTRIAL 14
CONTROLLER

<5^

MEMORY

^^^J
^^^ MEMORY L^B

port which sets an I/O

PORT

point ON or OFF. The I/O point, set by the computer, can
be either an external or internal I/O number. The particular

1^^

LOADING PROGRAM

point chosen can be an unused input number, which the

computer must disable before forcing it ON or OFF; it also
could be an unused external output number, which could
be reset by the controller to signal completion of the task.
In each case, the Industrial

power

lost.

INDUSTRIAL

14 loses the computer command

The use of a retentive memory
retention of the computer command.
if

COMPUTER

The controller reacts to this command simply by testing the
I/O number in its internal program and reacting according
to the computer-supplied input. The computer command
does not cause

a return

CONTROLLER

allows

b. VERIFYING

THE LOAD

transmission through the output

The external flag is sampled to determine if the
controller is ready to accept a new command.
register.

Figure 9-5

9-2

Down Line Loading

DUAL INTERFACE PORTS

INTERNAL INSTRUCTIONS

The

In addition to the instructions

Industrial

capable of communication with two

separate external devices through dual interface ports. The

normal

two ports supply instructions through a common memory

additional

priority

port;

prevents

logic

externally-supplied instructions.

any

confusion

control

functions,

introduced in Chapter 2 for

the

Industrial

repertoire of instructions,

many

has

of which are

useful for monitoring and computer-connected operations.

Each port has an output

The

following

paragraphs

introduce

these

instructions,

which unlike the normal testing and setting instructions,
often require two or three 12-bit memory words to express

The utility port is a DC14-F 9600 baud, serial
built

into

the

Industrial

programming

low-priority

14 and

maintenance

output

interface;

communicating with

primarily

interface,

used

operations.

This

the complete operation.

for

the

used

for

In general, these instructions can be stored in the Industrial

14's memory for execution, or they can be supplied

VT14, PDP-8, PDP-11 or other

computer,

external

device.

over

any

the

interface

by an

options

described later in this chapter.

The monitoring port

available for dedicated

computer

connection and is utilized by separately-purchased options,

MEMORY INSTRUCTIONS

described later in this chapter. It has the highest priority of

A number of internal Industrial 14 instructions are available

access to the memory port and uses output register 6.

for

These

priorities are

for the

infrequent occurrence

reading, writing,

and controlling memory operations;

they are summarized in Table 9-1.

when

both ports want to supply an instruction to the Industrial
14 at the same time. The monitoring port is granted access
to the
is

The first two instructions deal with the program counter

memory port for its instruction, then the utility port

serviced. This

(PC);

added wait is only a few microseconds.

Although the memory port

this

internal

shared, each port has an

executed. The

external flag (Figure 9-6).

program

The output

and

availability of any other output registers; the Industrial
is

which sequences through

pointing to the next location to be

CLRPC instruction is used at the end of a
back to the beginning. The RDPC

cycle

allows the external computer to obtain the

instructions

do not imply

13-bit register,

memory by

current PC value through the appropriate output register.

only capable of supporting two external interfaces at any

one time.

The next two

UTILITY^
PORT

OUTPUT
REGISTER

^
^

The CIF
field

/
MEMORY
PORT

CONTROLLER

OUTPUT
REGISTER 6

Y
MONITORING /
---»,
PORT

MEMORY

instructions are used to pass from

jump type

Normally, these instructions are not needed

instructions.

because the program counter automatically starts at the

beginning of the second memory field when

end of the

Industrial

one memory

to the other; these take effect only on

first.

back to field
Figure 9-6

used throughout normal

programs.

\ INDUSTRIAL

\
\

instructions are

The NOP is stored in every
unprogrammed location. The SKP is used to bypass SF
instructions when an SN has been executed.
14

Industrial

14 Dual Interface Ports

executed.)

(Similarly, the

reaches the

location 0, regardless of where in memory it

Normal

programming

concerned with instruction fields.

9-3

CLRPC instruction links
procedures

are

Table 9-1

Memory Control Instructions
Symbolic

CLRPC

Meaning

Octal

0004

Clear

PC -

tal<en

from location

sets

RDPC

forces the next instruction to be
in field

CLRPC als o

ON internal function 1777 (INITIALIZE).
PC -

0046

Read

0041

program

reads

counter

12-bit

the

of the

value

output

the

into

specified by the least-significant octal digit.

NOP

0000

No operation — used to occupy unprogrammed
memory locations.

SKP

0010

Skip

increments

the

program

counter,

thereby causing the next memory location to
be bypassed.

CIFO

0020

Change to instruction
from

- causes the

field

14 to begin executing instructions

Industrial

next JMP, JMS, JMR,

after the

field

JFF or JFN instruction.
CIF1

0030

Change to
from

instruction

field

— causes the

14 to begin executing instructions

Industrial
field

next JMP, JMS,

after the

JMR,

JFF, or JFN instruction.

EEM

0060

Enter External Mode - causes the Industrial 14
to suspend operations from its internal memory

and

execute

instructions

(e.g.

only
to

externally-supplied

allow

memory

written.)

LEM

0040

Leave External Mode — causes the Industrial 14
to begin operation from internal memory at the

location specified by the current value of the

program counter.

LDMEM

0022

Load Memory

Word

follows into

- loads the 12-bit word that

memory at the location specified

by the program counter. (This instruction can
only be executed when supplied externally and

when the Industrial 14 is in external mode.)

RDMEMorTRM
AAAA

0026 or

Read Memory - causes the content of memory

0021

location

AAAA

CDF

AAAA of the memory field, set with

instructions,

to be read into the

9-4

output

Table 9-1 (Cont)

Memory Control Instructions
Symbolic

Meaning

Octal

CDFO

0600

- causes all memory
Change to data field
reading by an external computer to be from the
first 4K of memory.

CDF1

0700

Change to data field 1 - causes all memory
reading by an external computer to be done
from the second 4K of memory.

Table 9-2
I/O Control Instructions

Symbolic

Octal

Meaning

CLR

0170

Clear all outputs - clears the I/O state memory
for all external outputs (1000-1377).

DOM

0160

Output Multiplexer

Disable
logical

prevents

the

states of outputs, as set in I/O storage

memory, from being supplied to

the

actual

output converters. Input states continue to be
updated.

EOM

0150

Enable Output Multiplexer

- allows output

states to be read to the output converters.

EOL

130

Enable Output Loop - for diagnostic purposes,
this instruction logically

to two inputs

connects each output

an inverse manner. After an

and
EOL, when output 1000 is on, inputs
400 will be off; 1001 turns off 1 and 401; etc.
input states have no effect on this

External
operation.

DOL

140

Disable

Output Loop

- allows the input to

reflect actual input conditions, rather than the

inverse of the associated output.

The CIF instructions are required to specify the memory

instruction,

memory writing operations. An EEM instruction
locks the Industrial 14 into External Mode to allow writing
of memory; a CIF instruction, followed by a JMP

field

field for

loads the program counter with the

and location to be written; a

memory

LDMEM transfers the

new content of memory; and finally, an LEM releases the
Industrial 14 to begin execution of the new program.

9-5

The last three instructions in Table 9-1 are used for reading
memory. The CDF instructions specify the memory field to
be

RDMEM instruction supplies the specific

the

read;

address to be read into either output register
indicated

the

Reading

instruction.

capacity

achieved through a second I/O storage memory

which holds

or 6, as

Industrial

As noted

Chapter 7, I/O points can be disabled. This

disable

Writing a

points.

state for each of the external

for a point

I/O

memory

the disable

disables the point. These disable bits are accessed by adding

memory can be performed in Interrupt Mode without any

2000 to the respective I/O point. Figure 9-8 illustrates this
memory. It can be accessed by the load, clear, read,

effect on the internal operation of the controller.

disable

set and move instructions in both bit and word mode.

Detailed procedures for reading and writing

memory are

given later in this chapter.
Internal functions (I/O

I/O CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
In

addition

the

instructions covered

not stored

normal

testing

Chapter

2, additional

and

setting

last

I/O

memory; they are stored in the

256 words of main memory. However, these functions

are accessed directly

I/O related

numbers beginning with 1400) are

I/O storage

by the I/O numbers, not by reading

memory.

instructions listed in Table 9-2, are available that control

the operation of the I/O multiplexer logic.

The functions before the I/O
The CLR instruction is used to logically (electrically) turn
off

all

external outputs.

one

instructions,

It is

and

equivalent to issuing 256 SF

each

for

output

number

partition

are accessed

and

manipulated identically to external I/O points (both word

from

mode

bit

points

instructions are available). However, these

do not have an associated I/O disable memory and

1000-1377.

cannot be disabled or forced. Although these points are

The DOM instruction has the same external effect as CLR;

the

however, it does not clear the logical state of the output, it

meaningful (Figure 9-9).

stored in the Industrial 14 12-bit main program memory,

four bits are zero and only the last eight bits are

first

merely halts the multiplexing of the output drivers such
that they turn off electrically. The

DOM/EOM instruction
outputs off for

Beyond

the

some period of time and later return them to the original

internal

functions

state.

All

therefore be used to switch

pair can

all

the

I/O

circuitry

only used diagnostically to check

within

the control

unit.

the

partition,
is

information

stored

for

considerably different (Figure 9-10).

12 bits are used and two words are associated with each

function.

The EOL instruction

I/O

The first word (even address) holds the current
The second word

value as a straight 10-bit binary value.

inversely

(odd address) holds the preset value also as a straight 10-bit

connects each output to two inputs: turning output 1000

binary value.

ON turns OFF inputs

used to record the status of the function; the leading two

and 400; 1001 turns

and 401

OFF, etc.

The leading two bits of the even address are

bits of the odd address record the type of function.

I/O MANIPULATION INSTRUCTIONS

The state of internal functions beyond the I/O partition, as

Inputs, outputs and internal functions can be accessed by

the TN,
2;

TF and SN, SF instructions, described in Chapter

however, additional

access

stored in bits

response to

and manipulation of I/O

states

possible in the Industrial 14, using the instructions

listed

Table 9-3. These instructions make use of the

and 1 of the even address, are established in

SN and SF

during "clock ticks"; bit

instructions.

Timers increment

of the even address

set

during the clock tick, which causes the current value to
equal

Industrial 14's unique structure for storing I/O states.

the

preset.

Counters

increment on the

instruction following an SF; bit

first

of the even address for

External I/O states are stored

counters will be set ON only during the increment which

Figure 9-7.

causes

in the manner represented in
They can be read, loaded, moved, cleared and

set individually

with the bit-mode instructions in Table 9-3

by referencing the particular point. Similarly, they can be
manipulated

equivalence

between

the

current value and the

preset. Specifically, the preset-reached bits,

and the states

tested by the Industrial 14's control program, are not set by

words of eight points, using the WD-mode

loading a

number into the current value which equals or

exceeds the preset.

instructions by referencing any point within the group.

9-6

Table 9-3
I/O Manipulation Instructions

Symbolic

CLRWD
AAAA

Octal

0003

AAAA

Meaning

Word - when referencing external
I/O disables, or internal functions up to
the I/O partition, all eight points with
the
Clear I/O
I/O,

same

three

first

octal

digits

AAAX are set OFF.

When referencing an I/O function beyond the
partition,

the

complete

12-bit

data word

cleared.

SETWD

0013

AAAA

Set I/O Word - when referencing external

I/O,

I/O disables, or internal functions up

to the I/O

partition,

same first

eight points with the

all

three octal

digits

referencing

partition,

AAAX are set ON. When

I/O

function beyond the I/O

the complete

12-bit

word

set to

7777.

LDWD
DDDD
AAAA

0023

DDDD
AAAA

- when referencing external
I/O disables, or internal functions up
to
the I/O partition, the eight points
with the
same first three octal digits
are set
Load I/O Word

I/O,

AAAX

according to the last eight bits of the data

XDDD. When

referencing

I/O

word

function

beyond the partition, the complete 12-bit data

word

loaded into the timer or counter as

shown in Figure 9-10.

MOVWD
AAAA

0033

Move

AAAA

I/O,

BBBB

the

I/O Word - when referencing external
I/O disables, or internal functions up to
I/O partition, the eight points with
the

same first three octal digits AAAX are parallel
transferred to the points BBBX.

When internal

functions

beyond

partition

referenced,

the

transferred.

Move operations

the

I/O

complete

12-bit

word

are
is

leave the source

word unchanged.

RDWD
AAAA

0036 or
0031

AAAA

Read I/O Word - transfers the I/O word
referenced to the specified output register, in
the format of Figure 9-9, for all points
except

internal

which

functions beyond the

are

read

I/O

Bit

I/O partition,

the format given

Figure

9-10.

CLRBIT

0103

Clear

AAAA

specified

- sets off the single point
AAAA. This instruction is not

defined for values of

AAAA beyond the I/O

partition (timers and counters).

9-7

Table 9-3 (Coot)
I/O Manipulation Instructions

Meaning

Octal

Symbolic

LDBIT

0123

MOOO

Load I/O Bit - loads I/O point AAAA with
This
M.
mask
of
bit
most-significant

AAAA

instruction

MOV BIT
AAAA

0133

AAAA

Move I/O Bit - transfers the state of I/O
AAAA to I/O point BBBB. The source point is

BBBB

unaffected by the move. This instruction

the

not defined for values of AAAA
counters).
beyond the I/O partition (timers and
is

point

defined

not

beyond
for values of AAAA and BBBB

the I/O partition (timers and

counters).

- loads the specified output

RDBIT

0136 or

Read I/O

TDor

0131

AAAA
with the state of the I/O point

AAAA

in the

format given

Bit

defined for

all

I/O

Figure 9-11.

RDBIT is

points including internal

functions beyond the partition.

SETBIT

0113

AAAA

Set 1/0 Bit - sets on the single point
for
by AAAA. This instruction is not defined
specified

values

AAAA beyond the

I/O

partition

(timers and counters).

3
13

Inputs

773

774

777

772

776

771

775

770

1003

1004

1007

1002

1006

1001

1005

1000

Outputs

1360

1370

1361
1371

1362
1372

1363
1373

Figure 9-7

1364
1374

1365

1366

1367

1375

1376

1377

I/O Storage Memory Organization

9-8

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2020

2021

2022

2023

2024

2025

2026

2027

2007"^

Input
Disables

2770

2771

2772

2773

2774

2775

2776

2777->

3000

3001

3002

3003

3004

3005

3006

3007""

Output

3360

3361

3362

3363

3364

3365

3366

3367

3370

3371

3372

3373

3374

3375

3376

3377

Figure 9-8

Disable Storage Memory Organization

Disables

1400

1401

1402

1403

1404

1405

1406

1407

1417

X
X

1410

1411

1412

1413

1414

1415

1416

1420

1421

1422

1423

1424

1425

1426

1427

X
X

1430

1431

1432

1433

1434

1435

1436

1437

1440

1441

1442

1443

1444

1445

1446

1447

1560

1561

1562

1563

1564

1565

1566

1567

1570

1571

1572

1573

1574

1575

1576

1577

NOTE:

I/O Partition is assumed to be 1600.

Figure 9-9

Organization of Bit-Oriented Internal Functions

Up/down counters use three I/O addresses but only two
real

data words. The "state" of the up/down counter

I/O POLLING

not

Polling of I/O states by an external computer can
be done
either singly or in a group of eight. The RDBIT

directly stored in these words. Bits
bits for

and 1 store the enable
the bi-directional counter. The state of the preset

and RDWD

instructions cause the specified output register to be loaded

equalling the current value is not stored in
memory; it is
determined only when tested by TD (RDBIT), TN and

with the words given in Figure 9-11.

instructions.

The RDBIT

instruction is used for all I/O points. When
RDBIT addresses a timer or a counter, it receives as the

working with timers and counters, always keep in mind

that timers must have I/O numbers below all

current state the same state as would be read
by a

counters. This

instruction.

means that the Industrial 14 will treat all functions beyond
the I/O partition as counters after the

which has bit

first

I/O function

of the odd address equal to 0.

9-9

The RDWD instruction reads eight bits, in-parallel, for

all

external I/O {including I/O disables) and for
internals up

ODD ADDRESS

EVEN ADDRESS

PRESET TIME (OCTAL)

CURRENT TIME (OCTAL)

r:; IMER ACTIVE (INSTANTANEOUS CONTACT)

IMER INCREMENTS ARE 0.1 sec.
1:TIMER INCREMENTS ARE I.Osec.
1:

TIMER EQUALS PRESET VALUE

TIMER INTERNAL FUNCTION

TIMER DATA FORMAT
ODD ADDRESS

EVEN ADDRESS

CURRENT COUNT (OCTAL)

r:
1

PRESET COUNT (OCTAL)

I— UNU SED

COUNTER =0
COUNTER 9*0

0: COUNTER

PRESET
>. PRESET
I: COUNTER

0: COUNTER <

INTERNAL FUNCTION

COUNTER DATA FORMAT
ODD ADDRESS

EVEN ADDRESS

PRESET COUNT (OCTAL)

CURRENT COUNT (OCTAL)
I— UNUSED

— DOWN COUNT ENABLE

UP COUNT ENABLE

NOTE

COUNTER INTERNAL FUNCTION

Third and fourth up/down counter words are not accessible
and contain no useful information

UP/DOWN COUNTER DATA FORMAT

Figure 9-10

Internal Function Storage Format

RDWD

ERROR CONDITIONS

accesses
the I/O partition. Beyond the i/0 partition,
9-10.
the full timer or counter data words as given in Figure

One requirement of any monitoring system is the ability to

not

determine current status within the Industrial 14; this is

Notice

that

the timer or counter value

octal,

particularly true if the controller is inoperative.

binary-coded decimal, or any other form.

A loss of either ac power to the controller or dc power

PROCESSOR STATUS WORD
I/O address 7777 {not memory address 7777)

used to

9-12
read the Industrial 14 processor status word. Figure
illustrates the bit format with an explanation of the internal
function partition
read with the

bits.

The processor status word is only

RDWD instruction. It can never be altered by

a move or load instruction.

within the controller will stop the Industrial 14 and cause
any) to be cleared.
all external outputs and I/O disables (if
to
Internal functions retain their state unless programmed
clear

when power returns. In the event of power loss, no

communication with the
power returns.

9-10

industrial

possible until

I/O NUMBER OF TESTED POINT

TYPE OF READ

CURRENT STATE (I/O MEMORY)
-DISABLE CONDITION (DISABLE
MEMORY)
-

STATE: 0- OFF (NOT DISABLED)
-

XX kO xxxl

can be read via the processor status word. Simultaneously,
the output multiplexer is disabled, causing the
output
converters to be turned off, although their logic state at the

Likewise,

ail

preserved in the

internal functions and

ail

memory.

I/O

I/O disables remain

fixed from the time the error was detected. Therefore,

xxx2 xxx3

traps cause the Industrial 14 to enter external mode,
which

time Of the error trap

(DISABLED)

RDBIT OUTPUT FORMAT
00

Detection of an error condition within the Industrial 14
not prevent communication to the controller. Error

will

xxx4 xxxS

monitoring

computer can access any of

this

desired. Error traps will occur if the Industrial

xxx6 xxx7

status,

CURRENT STATE OF I/O POINT:

-ON

installed

(UP TO I/O PARTITION)
01

internal

function storage (location

RDWD OUTPUT FORMAT
00

data

A third error trap is caused by the Industrial 14

program counter referencing the first location of

0-OFF

14 has a loss

of internal timing or has a short circuit on the
memory
bus.

the

7400 in the last memory field
the controller). The computer can read the

program counter to determine if this trap has occurred.

10-BIT VALUE

INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES
A series of instruction examples follow to illustrate the use

STA TUS
Bl TS

RDWD OUTPUT FORMAT

some of the extended instructions of the Industrial 14.

(BEYOND I/O PARTITION)
Read I/O Output Register Format

Figure 9-1 1

Table 9-4
Possible Internal Function Partitions

•INTERNAL FUNCTION
PARTITION

I MODE STATUS
14

NOT USED

Bit 4

Bits

Bite

J
1

SK 14 MEMORY
1

1 =

PROGRAM RUNNING
IN

1560

1600
1620

1660

1720

MEMORY FIELD

1640

MEMORY FIELD
1

TEST FLAG STATUS; 1=SET

1700

0=CLEARED
1

^POSSIBLE INTERNAL FUNCTION PARTITIONS ARE
LISTED IN TABLE 9-4
Figure 9-12

1740

14-0354

Processor Status Word Format

9-11

1520
1540

UPPER 4K

0=PROGRAM RUNNING
IN LOWER 4K

1460
1500

0=4K 14 MEMORY

EXTENDED MEMORY

1420
1440

1
1

I/O Partition

1400

RUNNING IN
EXTERNAL MODE
0=14 RUNNING IN
INTERNAL MODE

1= 14

8K MEMORY STATUS:

ADDRESS:

Bit?

1760

Example 1:

Clear

consecutive

addresses

retentive

1400-1421

memory

upon

TN 1777

Explanation

Perform the clear on start-up only.

Instructions

Explanation

CLRWD

Clear counter overflows, counter enable and

1700

current count bits; then preset counter

LDWD

to 60 (74 octal).

0074

JFN .+11

CLRWD

Clear counter 1700 and preset it to 60.

initial

start-up.

Instructions

Example 4:

Clears retentive memories or shift registers

1400

1400-1407.

CLRWD

Clears retentive memories or shift registers

1410

1410-1417

CLRBIT

Clears individual retentive memories 1420

1420

and 1421

1701
Shift data in registers 1420, 1421. 1422,

Example 5:

1423 and 1424 when 1402 transitions to

ON.
Explanation

Instructions

CLRBIT
1421

Test conditions for 1402 shift circuit

JFN .+ 11

Example 2:

1620 by clearing its
timer
Reset
instantaneous and delayed contacts and

JFN .+3
SF 1402

Because 1402 is being set off, bypass the shift

current value.

JFFNEXT
TN 1402

Check if 1402 is already ON; if not, set ON.

SN 1402
JFN NEXT
MOVBIT"^

shift.

Explanation

Instructions

CLRWD

Totally clears the current timer word, leaving

1620

its preset and

timer type unchanged.

Is this an OFF-to-ON

transition? If not, bypass

1423
1424

MOVBIT
Example 3:

Disable

and force on the consecutive

outputs 1000 -1012.
Explanation

Instructions

SETWD

1423
Shift instructions if this is a transition to ON.

MOVBIT
1421

1422
Disable outputs 1000-1007

MOVBIT
1420

3000

SETWD

1422

Force ON 1000-1007

1421

1000

SETBIT

Disable 1010

3010

SETBIT

Force ON 1010

1010

SETBIT

Disable 1011

INTERFACE OPTIONS
Interfaces are required in both the Industrial 14 and within
the computer to allow them to pass data in the form of the

3011

SETBIT

specific

Force ON 1011

interfaces

1011

SETBIT

just

introduced.

as to

their

capability

vary

The

available

and performance;

Table 9-5 summarizes these capabilities.

Disable 1012

3012

SETBIT

instructions

Force ON 1012

information

including

describing

installation

Industrial 14 Systems Manual.

1012

9-12

these

procedures,

hardware
contained

options,
in

the

Table 9-5
Industrial 14 Interface Characteristics
Industrial

14 Interface:

DA14-E (EL)

Connecting to:
Using Computer Interface:

DC14-F

PDP-8

PDP-11

(8/L External

KL8-JA

DL11-C

bus) KA8/E

Transfer Type:

Parallel

Serial

Maximum Distance:

50'

Number of 14s:

- 9.6K baud

1/KL8

1/DL11

Error Detection:

None

Parity

Interrupt Capability:

Yes

Individual

Initiated Transmissions:

Yes

Limited

Time to Poll One I/O Point
or Word (Transmission only):

».02 ms

«*6.6 ms

».02 ms

'*4.1

Capable of Controller

Time to Set One I/O Point
or Word (Transmission only):

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
All

Industrial

14 interfaces use the

memory port and an

output register. For computer monitoring,
the monitoring
port and output register 6
are normally utilized by
whichever interface option is selected.

Another characteristic is the manner in

transfer

instructions as

externally-supplied

can be supplied to the Industrial
14. The most common
technique for supplying instructions
is in Interrupt Mode
This operation allows an external
computer to interrupt the

program of the controller, and to
cause a single
instruction of any length to be
executed by the controllerthe controller then returns,
unaffected, to its internal
internal

using Interrupt Mode.

internal

instructions

were

all

load

EEM

the

internal

prevent

the

controller

from

Another characteristic found in all interfaces

(Enter

External

Mode)

Thereafter, all instructions are
supplied externally

LEM (Leave External Mode) instruction, is

actually

until the

While in External Mode, instructions

the

sampled

techniques

given to the

Interrupt

Mode

instruction

used

include

the ability

supplied

the

ability to sample the

been loaded which
these flags are

specific

interface

skip

instructions,

varies;

the

program

interrupts and bit test operations.

Industrial 14 controller.

ways. The first, and more common

executed

now should be read. The manner in which

instruction.

determine that the controller

output flag to determine that data has

program. Interrupt Mode is used to

examples, forcing the controller into
External

When

necessary

where necessary.

has

its

the

Mode for supplying

computer. All interfaces also have the

stored

operating, even when in External

program.

returning to

actually

Mode, by always supplying instructions
Mode. This manual uses the Interrupt

to sample the external flag to

The

memory. However, it is usually easier to
prevent

the program counter from

which instructions

second is to use the External Load
Mode, which allows the
program counter to increment as
it
would

can be supplied in two

The

approach, is to continue

various

logical

combinations

different meanings (Table 9-6).

9-13

flag

states

have

Table 9-6
Industrial 14 Interface Flag Meanings

can be used to supply

all

LDE

program counter incrementing as it
were supplied from internal

instructions

the

results

would

unchanged unless

instruction

externally-supplied

the

program counter

directly affected

by the instruction

GNI

the

Using

memory.

Meaning

accomplished, the LDE or the GNI
subsequent instructions. Using the

instruction. Once this

leaves

supplied by the GNI (a JMP instruction, for

example).

has loaded the output register with

data to be read by the monitoring
computer. In this case, the flags will

The

be set simultaneously.

ROR

accumulator any

externally-supplied

been

has

This

completed.

instruction did

not load data into

the output register.

internal

14 has loaded data to be
read by the monitoring computer.
Industrial

This combination

used

error.

the output register
the output flag when executed. Because
subsequent loading of the register will
is not buffered, any

whatever

available

for

14 to a PDP-8 family
dependent
computer. Selection of the -E or -EL model is
14
Industrial
upon the PDP-8 configuration. Refer to the

Systems Manual for

details.

The DA14-E

passes data at

maximum
extremely high speeds, but it is restricted to a
cable length of

one Industrial

had

been

50 feet. A further restriction is that only
14 can be connected to a PDP-8 family

The SEF

CEF

and

internal

conclusion

externally-supplied

its

flags

Refer

words have been

set,

The SCR

the PDP-8 will receive a program interrupt.

PDP-8 Introduction To Programming

the

program

loaded

and

the

through

the

instruction

present

instruction

interrupted

any command. A loss

Run in the Industrial 14 will cause an interrupt of the
PDP-8 computer for a maximum of five milliseconds until

to pass
Figure 9-13 is a sample program using the DA14-E
by
called
is
routine
The
instructions to the Industrial 14.

the following instruction sequence:

JMS XECUTE

#0F WORDS
WORD
WORD 2
WORD 3
1

(If

needed)

(If

needed)

instruction

controller

has

for

used to determine that the Industrial 14

running before attempting to give

the

set and the
has been executed, the external flag is
instruction.
next
the
for
memory
internal
returns to its

the

details.

supplied to the

memory port for execution. When the complete

The LDE

clear

if the
and the program interrupt bus. This means that
these
of
either
and
enabled
program interrupt facility is

the

interface,

and

instructions
external flag, respectively; the SOF and COF

the SCR instruction is executed.

all

sample

instructions

PDP-8 to
the
The DA14-E instructions used by
9-7;
communicate with the Industrial 14 are listed in Table
to
instructions
pass
the first two instructions are used to
in
instructions
pass
the Industrial 14. The GNI is used to
the
affecting
Interrupt Mode, or in External Mode, without
word of the
program counter within the Industrial 14. Each
GNI
passed to the Industrial 14 with a

When

executed.

instruction.

therefore,

another
important that the output register be read before
is
transfer,
data
causes a second
instruction, which

computer via a DA14-E at one time.

instruction

loaded,

sample and clear the output flag, respectively. The
bus
and output flags are both connected to the PDP-8 skip

Industrial

single

usually preceded in

external

DA14-E PARALLEL INTERFACE
The DA14-E (and DA14-EL) interface
a

some

interfaces to signal a transmission

connecting

by externally-supplied

flag, using the SOF
the program by a test of the output
The ROR clears
instruction to determine if data is present.

destroy
instruction within the

ROR instruction

The

instructions.

instruction

used to read into the PDP-8's
data that has been loaded into the output

instruction

Industrial
instruction can only be used after the
GNI
been forced into External Mode using a

The XECUTE routine passes all words of the instruction to
flag before
the Industrial 14, then waits for the external
register,
it is
returning. If data is loaded into the output

returned

the accumulator.

the output flag is not set,

the routine returns with accumulator zero.

9-14

Table 9-7

DA14-E Interface Instructions
Symbolic

Octal

GNI

6165

Meaning

- clears the external flag

Generate an Interrupt

and loads one word Into the memory port from

PDP-8 accumulator. When all words of the
instruction have been loaded individually with
the

the

GNI, the instruction is executed and the external
flag

GNI

set.

Industrial

no effect on the

has

internal

14 program except as a direct result of

the instruction it is used to supply.

LDE

6164

Load and execute External - with the Industrial
14 in External Mode, LDE loads the memory port
from the PDP-8 accumulator identically to the
GNI. The LDE allows the program counter within
the Industrial 14 to increment normally
with each

word loaded by the LDE.

ROR

6176

Read Output Register - clears the output flag,
the PDP-8 accumulator, then loads the

clears

output register value into the accumulator.

SEF

6161

Skip on

External

Flag

- skip the next PDP-8

memory location if the external flag is set within
the

Industrial 14. The external flag is set at
the
conclusion of each externally-supplied instruction.

CEF

6172

Clear External Flag

- clear the external flag, to

remove an interrupt request once it is detected by
the PDP-8.

SOF

6171

Skip on Output Flag

- skips the next PDP-8

memory location if the Industrial 14 output flag is
set,

indicating that new data has been loaded into

the output register.

COF

6167

Flag - clear the output flag to
remove an interrupt request once it is detected by

Clear Output

the

PDP-8.

instruction

when

unnecessary to use the
an

ROR

COF

used to read the

output register.

SCR

6175

on Controller Running - skips the next
PDP-8 memory location if the Industrial 14 is

Skip

running. It is not possible to enter external
mode
or to have any effect on the Industrial
14 if it is

not running.

9-15

/DA14-E EXECUTE SUBROUTINE

XECUTE,

CLA
TAD

XECUTE

/GET WORD COUNT

CNTR
XECUTE
XECUTE

/SET UP COUNTER

CIA

DCA
XECUTE1,

ISZ

TAD

/INCREMENT POINTER
/PICK UP NEXT WORD
/SEND TO THE 14

GNI

CLA
CNTR
XECUT1
XECUTE

ISZ

JMP
ISZ

SEP
JMP

/ALL WORDS SENT?

GET NEXT
/YES: SET UP RETURN
/WAIT FOR EXTERNAL FLAG
/NO:

-1

/OUTPUT FLAG SET?
/NO: RETURN WITH AC=0
/YES: READ OUTPUT REGISTER INTO AC
/RETURN

SOF
SKP

ROR
JMP

XECUTE

CNTR,
DA14-E Execute Subroutine

Figure 9-13

Program examples at the end of this chapter make use
this routine

poll

I/O points, load

memory, etc. This

routine does not make use of the program interrupt

facility,

If the
nor does it handle an Industrial 14-initiated transfer.
reporting
monitoring computer expects to receive status
recommended that
data from the Industrial 14, it is
for
program interrupt techniques be used. The skip chain

handling an interrupt would include the SOF instruction

transfer.
detect the presence of an Industrial 14-initiated

Save program constants

split
Each word to be transmitted to the Industrial 14 is

into

two separately-transmitted characters

shown

which the
Figure 9-14. Two mode bits specify the form in
be executed: Interrupt Mode (no PC
Setting
increment) or External Load Mode (PC increment).
to
equivalent
both mode bits to 1 when using the DC14-F is

instruction

when using the DA14-E.
when using the
Similarly, setting ON only Mode Bit
DC14-F is equivalent to transferring the word with an LDE

transferring the word with a GNI

when using the DA14-E. Normally, only
Mode (both mode bits = 1) is used, since it is

instruction

}

SOF
SKP
JMP

{Consult Digital Equipment Corporation for information
the use of the DC14-F at rates other than 9600 baud.)

/is Industrial

DATA 14

14 interrupting?

/No: Check other devices
/Yes: Service by reading output

Interrupt

undesirable

affect

the

program counter except by

direct JMP instruction.

/register

When transmitted, an optional eighth bit can be added for

Service slower devices.

parity,

:]
It

recommended that the Industrial 14's output register

be serviced as early in the skip chain as possible to

protect

the

DC14-F

(KL8-JA or
interface and in the computer interface
number of
DL11-C). A start and a stop bit complete the
bits in the character transmitted.

against lost data.

transmission
Notice that two-word instructions require the
require six
instructions
of four characters and three-word
14
Industrial
the
Similarly, data received from

DC14-F SERIAL INTERFACE
The DC14-F is a standard EIA interface for the Industrial
It can
14 that normally transmits data at 9600 baud.
KL8-JA
communicate to a PDP-8/E, M or F, using a
Teletype interface, or to a PDP-11, using a DL11

depending upon switch selection

characters.

comprises two seven-bit characters as shown in

Figure 9-15

six most-significant
(plus parity, start, and stop bits). The
bits are received first,

interface.

9-16

together with the equivalent of the

The six least-significant bits are received
the second character with the equivalent of the output
external flag.

the

Parity

generated and can be checked by the receiving

parity

received.

buffers

without

are performed by the DC14-F
checked for each character as it is

The computer can

itself.

transfer

as
flag,

not receive the

will

which will occur if the

computer. This

The KL8-JA

instructions,

Industrial

are listed

14,

used to transfer data to the
Table 9-8. These instructions

to execute the

include a group for the transmitter to the Industrial
14

all-zero characters to the
equivalent to external flag = 0, output

codes 631X) and for the receiver from the Industrial
14 (octal codes 630X). The XMIT instruction is used to
send a character to the Industrial 14 and the STDF
checks

causing

the

controller

and returns two

instructions,

initializes

complete instruction is received and executed.

a parity error is detected, the DC14-F clears its

and

loss

checks

error

interface;

this

transmission of the external

computer interface.
Several

characters

detect

flag.

flag = 0, and data word = 0.

(octal

to determine

the interface

The SRCF

character.

ready to accept the next

used to determine

returned from the Industrial 14 and the
received data into the PDP-8 accumulator.

FIRST 6 BITS

MODE BIT 0: ALWAYS

data has

RDRD reads the

LAST 6 BITS

The LDSE instruction allows the program to disconnect the

KL8-JA interface from the interrupt bus.

MODE BIT
0: LDE EQUIVALENT
TRANSFER
1. GNI EQUIVALENT
TRANSFER

This permits use of the program interrupt facility for other
devices without causing interrupts for the Industrial
14.
also controls the reading of error status with

The LDSE

each data word read by an

DC14-F Receiver Data Format

Figure 9-14

status obtained when

RDRD instruction. The error

enabled is shown in Figure 9-16.

For a further discussion of these errors, consult the KL8-JA

Asynchronous

Data

Terminal

Control

Manual

(DEC-8E-HRJC-D-KL8-JA).
EF

FIRST 6 BITS

TZTERNAL FLAG

SECOND 6 BITS

•OUTPUT FLAG

Figure 9-17

KL8-JA

pass

function

identical

Figure

instructions

receives

returns

into

the

DC14-F and

Industrial

14.

Its

to the similar routine presented

9-13 for the DA14-E.

instruction

DC14-F Transmitter Data Format

Figure 9-15

a sample program using the

two

splits

all

characters, transmits

words of the
all

characters,

both characters of the return transmission and
with the output register value (if any) in the

PDP-8's accumulator. Like the DA14-E XECUTE routine,

A second check ensures proper synchronization between
the

and

controller

characters

(two,

computer.

four or six)

are

14, the

Because

all

examples presented

required

for

characters

the

Industrial

14, each

I FLAG

OVERRUN ERROR
FRAMING ERROR
PARITY ERROR
ERROR DETECTED

transmission speed of 9600 baud, this means that no more

than 500 microseconds can be tolerated between
characters

until

has

BIT

NOT USED

successive character

must be
transmitted within one-half character time. At the normal

instructions

06
6 BIT DATA

externally-supplied

instruction. Once the first character of an instruction is sent

XMIT

the complete instruction of up to six

been sent.

the Industrial

14 does not

receive each character within the allotted time, it ignores

all

Figure 9-16

9-17

the end of this

single

hardware must protect

provided by restricting the amount of time

between

multiple

against the execution of misconstructed instructions. This

protection

for

chapter.

the

interrupt of the Industrial

allovred

usable

KL8-JA Receiver Word

WORD

Table 9-8

KL8-JA Instructions for DC14-F Communication
Symbolic

Octal

Meaning

STTF

6310

Set Transmitter Flag - sets the transmit done flag

without transmitting a character.

STDF

6311

Sl<ip on Transmit Done Flag

CTDF

6312

Clear Transmit Done Flag

SKPI

6315

Skip on Interrupt

- skips the

next sequential

PDP-8 memory location if either the transmit or
receive flag

provided the interrupt enable is

set,

set.

XMIT

Transmit - clears the transmit flag and transfers

6316

the character from the seven least-significant bits
of the accumulator to the Industrial 14.

SRCF

6301

Skip on Receiver Flag

CRCF

6302

Clear

Flag

Receiver

also

clears

the

PDP-8

accumulator.

RDCO

6304

Receive

ORed -

Data

inclusively

ORing

reads the

receiver

data

with any data already in the

PDP-8 accumulator.

LOSE

Load

6305

Enable

Status

set

interrupt

enable

and status word enable
according to AC
=
enable,
(0) = disable.
according to bit 10. (1)
bit

RDRD

6306

Receiver
Industrial

- read data from the
accumulator. Error
PDP-8
14 into the

Data

Read

status is also read provided it is enabled.

not recommended for status reporting
monitoring) from the Industrial 14 to the

The DC14-F
(transition

computer because
register.

several

memory could

all

"XECUTE"

subroutines,

introduced

previously,

and are

therefore independent of the selected interface.

does not double buffer the output
instructions

load

the

output

the

Industrial

14's

Figure 9-18 is an instruction sequence to read the state of a

within one

single I/O point.

transmission time (approximately 1.1 ms), lost data would
reporting are
result. Therefore, initiated transfers for status

can be used to read the state of any

input, output, internal function or disable state using the

proper value for lONUM (Table 9-9).

possible over the DC14-F only if two such reports can never

occur within the same 1.1 ms period.

The program in Figure 9-19 will read eight points in
parallel. Only the I/O functions appended by an asterisk

PROGRAM EXAMPLES
This section presents examples of monitoring functions
with the Industrial 14. The examples make use of the

may be read in parallel.

9-18

The program
retentive

Figure

9-20

will

set an

input, output,

The technique for loading, clearing or setting

memory, or I/O disable ON. A similar routine

parallel

could be used for CLRBIT or LDBIT. This
routine would
only be used for the I/O numbers followed
by an asterisk

Loading and reading timers uses the technique
shown

(Table 9-9).

Figures 9-22 and 9-23.

/DC14-F/KL8-JA EXECUTE SUBROUTI NE

XECUTE,

CLA

TAD

XECUTE

/GET WORD COUNT

CIA

DCA

XECUT1,

XECUT2,

CNTR
XECUTE
TAD
XECUTE
DCA
SAVE
CLA CLL CMA RAL
DCA
CNTR2
TAD
SAVE
BSW
ISZ

AND
TAD

K77
K100

TAD
ISZ

JMP

SAVE
CNTR 2
XECUT2

/NO:

CNTR

/YES
/ALL WORDS SENT

XECUT1
XECUTE
CLA CLL CMA RAL
DCA
CNTR 2
DCA
CNTR3
ISZ

SRCF
SKP
JMP
ISZ

JMP
JMP

/GET WORD

/RTR;RTR,RTR, INPDP-8/L

/SEND CHARACTER
/WAIT FOR TRANSMITTER DONE

JMP

WAIT,

/STORE IT TEMPORARILY
/SET AC =-2
/SET UP CHARACTER COUNTER

/GET NEXT CHARACTER

CLA
ISZ

/SET UP COUNTER
/INCREMENT POINTER
/PICK UP NEXT WORD

/SET INTERRUPT MODE BITS

XMIT
STDF
JMP .CLA

/GET WORD
/SENT BOTH CHARACTERS?

/NO:

SEND NEXT

GET NEXT WORD

/YES: SET UP RETURN
/SET AC = -2

/SET UP RECEIVED CHARACTER COUNTER
/SET UP OVERTIME COUNTER FOR 4K

XECUT3
CNTR3

/WAITED LONG ENOUGH?

WAIT-HI

/NO:

ERR0R1

/YES:

CHECK FLAG AGAIN
ERROR

(Continued on next page)
Figure 9-17

eight points in

illustrated in Figure 9-21.

DC14-F Execute Subroutine

9-19

XECUT3,

CLA CLL CML RTL
LOSE
SPA
JMP

ERR0R2
CNTR2
XECUT4

ISZ

JMP

AND
TAD
AND
TAD
XECUT4,

/SET TO READ ERROR STATUS

/READ CHARACTER AND STATUS

RDRD

JMP

/SET AC = 2

K177
K7700
K77

OUTREG
i

XECUTE

CLL RTL
RTL
RTL

/COMMUNICATIONS ERROR
/NO ERRORS: WHICH CHARACTER?
/FIRST HALF
/STRIP TO 7 BITS AND ADD CONSTANT

/TO SET LINK = OUTPUT FLAG
/STRIP TO 6-BIT DATA WORD
/COMBINE WITH FIRST HALF

/RETURN WITH VALUE IN AC
/FIRST WORD - MOVE LEFT
/TO PUT FLAG IN LINK AND WORD
/IN THE MOST SIG. BITS

AND
DCA

K7700

/STRIP TO SIX BITS

OUTREG

/SAVE FIRST HALF

SZL
JMP

WAIT

EXTERNAL FLAG NOT SET
/PROBABLY DUE TO PARITY ERROR
RETRANSMIT
/AT RECEIVING DC14-F. SHOULD

/IF

ERROR,

/COMPLETE INSTRUCTION

/NO RETURN IN REASONABLE DELAY

ERR0R1,

/FAULTY INTERFACE OR STOPPED 14.

/ERROR DETECTED ON INCOMING
/WORD FROM 14.

ERR0R2,

CNTR,
SAVE,

CNTR 2,
K77,

K100,

100

CNTR3,
K177,
K7700,

177

7700

OUTREG,
XMIT =
STDF =
SRCF =
LDSE =

RDRD =

6316
6311

6301

6305
6306

Figure 9-17

/KL8-JA TRANSMIT INSTRUCTION
/KL8-JA SKIP ON TRANSMIT DONE

/KL8-JASKIP0N RECEIVER FLAG
/KL8-JA LOAD STATUS DISABLE
/KL8-JA READ RECEIVED DATA

DC14-F Execute Subroutine (Continued)

9-20

POLL,

XECUTE

JMS

/CALL EXECUTE ROUTINE

RDBIT
POINT,

lONUM
CIA

/CHECK FOR PROPER RETURNED WORD

TAD POINT
SNA
JMPOFF
CLLRAL
SNA
JMPON
JMP ERROR
RDBIT =

/I/O POINT IS OFF

/I/O POINT IS ON
/I/O POINT IMPROPERLY READ

0136

IONUM =

/POINT TO BE TESTED

Figure 9-18

Polling a Single Point

Table 9-9
I/O Number Ranges
Polled State

Range For lONUM

Input*

0-777

Output*

1000-1377

Retentive Memories*

1400 -I/O Partition

Timers
instantaneous

Odd Address Beyond I/O Partition

Delayed

Even Address Beyond I/O Partition

Event Counters
Preset reached

Odd Address Beyond I/O Partition

Up/Down Counters
Equal preset

1760, 1764, 1770, 1774

Equal

1761, 1765, 1771, 1775

External I/O Disables*

*Valid for both BIT and

2000-3377

WD operations

9-21

READS.
2

RDWD
lONUM
CLL RAL
SPASZL
/YES:

RTL
SZL
JMS
SPA
JMS
RTL
SZL
JMS
SPA
JMS
RTL
SZL
JMS
SPA
JMS

/MOVE WORD LEFT
ON?
/I/O POINT

/EITHER OF NEXT TWO BITS SET?
/YES:

ONO

ERROR

/YES
/I/O POINT 1 ON?
/YES

0N1

/MOVE WORD LEFT
/I/O POINT 2 ON?

0N2

/YES
/I/O POINT 3 ON?
/YES

0N3

/MOVE WORD LEFT
/I/O POINT 4 ON?

0N4

/YES
/I/O POINT 5 ON?
/YES

0N5

/MOVE WORD LEFT
/I/O POINT 6 ON?

RTL
SZL
JMS
SPA
JMS

RDWD =

ERROR

JMP ERROR
RTL
SPA SZL
JMP ERROR

0N6

/YES
/I/O POINT 7 ON?
/YES

0N7

0036

/ONE POINT IN GROUP OF 8 TO BE
/TESTED

lONUM

Figure 9-19

Polling Eight Points in Parallel

9-22

FORCE,

XECUTE

JMS

/FOR CLRBIT, OR SETBIT: 3 FOR LDBIT

SETBIT

lONUM
SZA

/ALSO SUPPLY A MASK FOR LDBIT

ERROR

JMP

SET BIT

/COULD USE CLRBIT OR LDBIT

0113

lONUM =

/POINT TO BE SET ON

Figure 9-20

FORCES,

Setting a Single I/O Bit

XECUTE

JMS
3

/FOR LDWD; 2 FOR SET WD OR CLRWD

LDWD
MASK

/FOR LDWD ONLY

lONUM
SZA

ERROR

JMP

LDWD =
MASK =

0023

lONUM =

/COULD USE SETWD OR CLRWD
/STATE OF POINTS TO BE SET
/I/O POINTS TO BE LOADED

Figure 9-21

Loading Eight I/O Points in Parallel

9-23

TMRSET,

XECUTE

JMS
3

LDWD
VALUE
lONUM
SZA
JMP

LDWD =
VALUE =
IONUM=

ERROR

0023

mWIER VALUE IN OCTAL WITH PROPER CONTROL BITS
/ODD I/O NUMBER OF TIMER

Figure 9-22

TMRRD,

JMS

Loading a Timer Preset

XECUTE

RDWD
lONUM

RDWD =

0036

/ODD ADDRESS TO READ PRESET
/EVEN ADDRESS TO READ CURRENT VALUE

lONUM =

Figure 9-23

Reading a Timer Preset

9-24

Figure 9-24 shows a technique for reading memory content

from the

Industrial 14.

Writing

A simple looping routine could be

memory

Industrial

seen

Figure

9-25

requires

the

14 to be in External Mode. Note the use of the

added to successively compare memory content read from

CLR instruction to turn all outputs off while memory is

the

written. Simple modifications would load a whole section

monitoring computer. Reading of memory does not require

of memory rather than just a single location. Once loaded,

Industrial

the controller to be

core

External

image

stored

within

Mode and can actually be

memory should

be verified, then the internal program

done without affecting the control of the system by the

started

Industrial 14.

Industrial 14 to leave External Mode.

/READ 14 MEMORY ROUTINE
READM,
CLA
JMS
XECUTE
1

CDFZ14
SZA
JMP
JMS

ERROR
XECUTE

setting the

/SET DATA FIELD TO EITHER
/FIELD ZERO OR ONE AS DESIRED

/NO OUTPUT REGISTER SHOULD HAVE
/BEEN RETURNED

/READ MEMORY CONTENT AT
/SPECIFIED LOCATION

RDMEM
LOCADD
DCA

CDFZ14 =

MEM14

/LOCATION TO BE READ
/MEMORY CONTENT AS IN AC

/EITHER CDFOorCDFI FOR THE 14

0600 or 0700
0026

LDMEM =
LOCADD =

/ADDRESS OF LOCATION TO BE READ

Figure 9-24

Reading a Memory Location Within the Industrial 14

/WRITE 14 MEMORY ROUTINE
WRITEM,
CLA
JMS
XECUTE

/FORCE 14 INTO EXTERNAL MODE

EEM
SZA
JMP
JMS

ERROR
XECUTE

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

ERROR
XECUTE

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

/CLEAR ALL 14 OUTPUTS

1
1

CLR
SZA
JMP
JMS

/SET INSTRUCTION FIELD FOR LOAD

1
1

CIFZ14

SZA
(Continued on next page)
Figure 9-25

Writing a Memory Location Within the Industrial 14

9-25

program counter and causing the

JMP
JMS

ERROR
XECUTE

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

/SET PROGRAM COUNTER FOR

/LOCATION TO BE WRITTEN

JMP14

LOCADD
SZA
JMP
JMS

ERROR
XECUTE

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

ERROR

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

/WRITE ONE WORD OF 14 MEMORY

LDMEM
LOCVAL
SZA
JMP

MODIFY OTHER LOCATIONS AND VERIFY
PROPER LOADING BY READING MEMORY
JMS

XECUTE

/SET PROGRAM COUNTER TO

/STARTING LOCATION

CLRPC
SZA
JMP
JMS

ERROR
XECUTE

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

ERROR

/A RETURNED VALUE IS AN ERROR

/RELEASE 14 FROM EXTERNAL MODE

LEM
SZA
JMP

EEM =
CLR =
CIFZ14 =

JMP 14 =

LDMEM =
LOCADD =
LOCVAL =
CLRPC =
LEM =

0060
0170
0020 or 0030
0024
0022

/EITHER CIFOOR CIF1 FOR THE 14.

/MEMORY ADDRESS TO BE LOADED
/MEMORY VALUE TO BE STORED
0004
0040

Figure 9-25 (Continued) Writing a Memory Location Within the Industrial 14

9-26

APPENDIX A
INPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET

INPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET
I/O Number

Symbol

Function

Normal
Condition

APPENDIX B

OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET

OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT SHEET
I/O Number

Symbol

Function

APPENDIX C
INTERNAL FUNCTION

ASSIGNMENT SHEET

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS ASSIGNMENT SHEET
Preset or

I/O Number

Symbol

Function

Limits

Type

APPENDIX D
INDUSTRIAL 14
PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY

WITH THE VT14
14

Industrial

programs

BOOL- 143 and

prepared

debugged

ODP-143

PAL-143

may

and

not

be
compatible with the VT14 Programming Terminal and are
therefore incapable of being changed.

The VT14 Programming Terminal

recognizes

only the

instructions in Table D-1. Special attention must be given
to the restrictions posed

by these instructions within the

Industrial 14 Program.

1000= H«[]2*{3 + 4)+5]] » 6

NOTE
Industrial

monitoring,

change field Instructions are incompatible with
the VT14.

JFN Restriction
The JFN instruction is caused by the last or only entry into
a

branch (going from

left to right)

before the set output

400

0001

410

401

411

JFN

0002

412
413
414

0006
0016
1000

TF
JFN
402 TF
403 JFN
404 TF
405 JFF

and

subroutine,

0003

415
416

406 TF

0004

407 JFF

JFN
SN
SKP
SF

0005

1000

or the last instruction

ON position in a circuit diagram;

JFN Restriction Ladder Diagram,
Boolean Equation and Equivalent

Figure D-1

otherwise a JFF instruction should be used.

Industrial 14 Instructions

For example, the JFN instructions in locations 401, 403,
and 411

(Figure D-1) are caused by the last entry into

branches A, B, and C.
If
If

a JFN instruction is inserted incorrectly, it is displayed as

ODP-143 is used to load the Industrial 14 program, the

user must validate that only

dummy branch on the VT14 Programming Terminal. If an
attempt is made to store a circuit with dummy branches,
the VT14 will output a "FORMAT ERROR" message.

memory

(location

one CLRPC instruction is in
7377 of the highest available memory

field).

NOP Restriction
CLRPC Restriction
Binary

tapes

instruction

read

To omit sensing a contact (TF or TN) using ODP-143, a
by the

VT14 have only one CLRPC

memory; this

always stored

NOP instruction must not be inserted in its place. The
VT14 interprets the NOP instruction as the end of a circuit.

location

7377 of the highest memory field. To ensure this, the VT14
should be used to clear

Thus,

memory first, and then load the

Figure D-2,

instruction sensing

program tapes via the Teletype and VT14.

input 2

TF3) instead of a NOP instruction.

D-1

not needed, insert an

one of the adjoining inputs (TF1

Table D-1
industrial 14 Instructions Compatible With the VT14

Instruction

Symbolic

TF 10

Meaning

Numeric

4000+ 10

Test an input, output, or internal

function for the OFF

TN 10

6000+ 10

0000 +

None

state.

Test an input, output, or internal
function for the

Restriction

None

ON state.

Set output or internal function

Instructions must always be programmed

OFF.

in the order:

SN
SKP
SF

2000 +

Set output or internal function

The SN instruction must always occupy
a location whose address is divisible
by 4

JFF NNN

2000 + NNN

Jump to location NNN if the test
flag is OFF.

Only the last entry into a branch
left-to-right causes a JFN instruction;

otherwise, all other jump instructions

should be JFF.

JFN NNN

SKP

2400+ NNN

0010

Jump to location NNN if the test

A JFN instruction must always precede

flag is ON.

an SN position.

Skip the following memory

None

location unconditionally.

CLRPC

0004

Clear the program counter. Causes

an unconditional jump to Location

0000

location 7377 in the highest memory
field.

in Field 0.

NOP

This instruction must occupy only

This instruction signifies the end of a

No operation

circuit to the VT14.

MOVBIT

0133

Move I/O bit from I/O address

This instruction should only be used in

to I/O address.

a shift circuit. Refer to the format

described in the Movbit Restriction
(following).

D-2

1400

1000

LOWLIM
1420

MILIM
1425

1400

Figure D-2

Circuit

Diagram

LOWLIM
1420

The

original

and

corrected

Industrial

instructions

HILIM
1423

follow:

Origina

Corrected

Figure D-3

0001

0002
0003
006
1000

205

TF
TF
TF
JFN
SN
SKP

206

1000

200
201

202
203
204

Shift Register Circuits for

VT14 Compatibility

0001

0003

The following are the original and changed

006

1000

Original Industrial 14

Changed Industrial 14

Instructions

Movbit Restrictions

1000

1001

TF
JFN

0001

Before changing the shift register limits with ODP-143, the

.+3

1001

.+4

1002

1400

1004

.+23

1005

1400

1006
1007

.+20

user

should

become

familiar

with

Industrial

1002

JFF

instruction format for a shifter circuit (Chapter 3).

the

The

1003

SKP

following example illustrates the method for changing shift

1004

VT14 compatibility.

1005

SF
JFF

still

maintaining

Industrial

instructions:

1000

D-3

.+15

1400

1010

SN
JFN

.+12

MOVBIT

1003

1010

TN
SN
JFN

1011

MOVBIT

1011

1012

1424

1012

1422

1013

1425

1013

1423

1006
1007

To reduce the shift register limits to 1420 as the'low limit,
and 1423 as the high limit, movbit instructions and two
conditional jump instructions must be altered.

TF
JFN
JFF
SKP
SF
JFF

1014

MOVBIT

1014

MOVBIT

1015

1423

1015

1421

1016

1424

1016

1422

1017

MOVBIT

1017

MOVBIT

1020

1422

1020

1420

1021

1423

1021

1421

1022

MOVBIT

1022

NOP

1023

1421

1024

1422

1025

MOVBIT

1026

1420

1027

1421

1030

NOP

0001
.+3

.+4

1400

INDUSTRIAL 14 SOFTWARE MANUAL

T?^o^«t.»o
Keader s

DEC-14-ISUMA-B-D

n^^^
Comments

Your comments and suggestions will help us in our continuous effort to improve the quaUty and usefulness

our publications.

What is your general reaction to this manual?

In your judgment is it complete, accurate, well organized, well

written, etc.? Is it easy to use?

What features are most useful?

What faults do you find with the manual?

Does this manual satisfy the need you think it was intended to satisfy?

Does it satisfy your needs?

Why?

Would you please indicate any factual errors you have found.

Please describe your position.

^^^^
Street

^ity

_____ Organization
_

—

State

Department
_

Zip or Country

Fold Here

Do Not Tear Fold Here and Staple
-

FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 33

MAYNARD, MASS.
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES
Postage will be paid by:

Digital Equipment Corporation

Technical Documentation Department

146 Main Street
Maynard, Massachusetts 01754